Home
xLogic user`s Manual
Contents
1. 1 Slave Address 1 is default 2 Communication parameters BPS is baud rate Stopbits Databits Communication type RS232 RS485 Actually RS232 or RS485 are just interface of xLogic 3 Command register address and register count EASY xLogie Micro PLC Read one group coil status OO000 0XXxXxX Read Coil Status output Fetch one group data of the status of switch input Read input Status input relay 10000 1XXXX Read data of multi holding register 40000 4XXXX Read Holding Registers Output register Read data of input registers 3000 3XXxXxX Read Input Registers Note Please use 03 command to read AI AO of xLogic 4 Where to save the data read from Slave Example The following we ll take a example that one xLogic Master communicate with other xLogic Slave via RS485 Master Example 1 Get Q1 status of SLAVE1 xLogic and then save the bit status to F1 ore Alarm communication status Hl B001 Nodbus Read Parameter Comment EJ Block name B002 M2 Q001 M pa REGI e Slave Address ji ee J Communicate Params 00 00st BPS a600 Stopbits f Databits e l Paritybit None Comm Type rs232 TimeOut f5 1 108 Protocol Modbus RT Data Register Index High Low Command o1 Read Coils x Register addr fo Count fi mm BN Data addr T If count was set 4 the Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 of xLogic station No 1
2. Ei E CEE A a H dressi E Rem Off 934 00 a _ Rem Off 934 00 Base Address 4 BOOS AM3 Base Address 4 B003 AM3 V1 a 234 00 Rem Off 0 00 1 888 888 00 Rem Off 888 00 Wo 6 5 59 Square Boot Short Description This function is used to calculate the square root of the number present as an input with accuracy to two EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC Hecimal points amp Connection Description Function validation input Until this input is activated the function remains inert Validation is active implicitly if it has not been connected Operation Example for X 20000 gt Root of X 141 42 The value read as an output of the function is 14142 If used as an input the number is negative and the result is O Performance The calculation is accurate to 0 01 either way 6 5 60 Sin Cos Short Description This function is used to calculate the cos and sin of an angle between O and 90 Input Validation Function validation input Until this input is activated the function remains inert Validation is active implicitly if it has not been connected Input Angle Represents the angle in degrees Its value must be between 0 and 900 fo an angle between 0 and 90 Output Sin Result of Angle sin x 10000 Output Cos Result of Angle cos x 10000 Performance The function calculates the cos and the si
3. APT tint 7 HGE teag DETE TAE e te reef i I wo m Di Fig7 9 4 Dialogue Box of Existed Document 3 Click the file you want to open with left button of mouse then click button Open After opening the document you can modify or print the document EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC 5 9 2 Edit Function Diagram Program 6 9 2 1 Place Function Block While you set up a new document you can write your control Program in the new program interface The method and process of placement is as follows The method of placing function block is as follows choose function block needed from the workspace left of the program interface Operation Procedure 1 Choose corresponding function group Constant Basic Special list and various blocks can be selected Refer to the function block instruction chapter 6 for detail instruction of function blocks 2 Click the block you needed with left button of the mouse 3 Move the mouse to the proper place in the program interface click with left button of the mouse then complete the placement of a block 4 According to above operation put all modules in program interface E g To complete all the function block of one certain system control as Fig 7 10 1 shown put all function modules into the edit program interface Dj test p me sane es A y msp BL Ee t Pial sem Pe Fy J mon Nagi rd Wa gad P gL le CE CECE F
4. DEFROST CYCLE 6 5 51 Comparison of 2 values Short Description The COMPARE function is used to compare two analog values Comeon pemon SSS Input an ENABLE FUNCTION Discrete type input ENABLE FUNCTION Input VALUE 1 Integer type input Input VALUE 2 Integer type input If the VALUE 1 or VALUE 2 input is not connected the value is set to 0 The function provides a discrete type OUTPUT The output is active if the result of the comparison between VALUE 1 and VALUE 2 is true and if the ENABLE FUNCTION input is active or not connected The output does not change state if the ENABLE FUNCTION input changes from Active to Inactive state Parameters The comparison operators that can be chosen from the Parameters window are Symbol Description Greater than Greater than or equal to Equal to Different Less than or equal to Less than User Manual xLogic Micro PLC Short Description This function is used to activate the output corresponding to the value present on the Value input Connection Description Function validation input Until this input is activated the function remains inert Validation is active implicitly if it has not been connected Input VALUE Value to be compared VALUE N Output ON if Value Value N Outputs VALUE N 1 VALUE N 2 VALUE N 3 VALUE N 4 VALUE N 5 VALUE N 6 VALUE N 7 Output ON if Value Output ON if Value Output ON if V
5. Serial Settings This item is very important you must set as the above figure shows Note Baudrate can be set 4800 9600 19200 and the corresponding communication port must be set the same as baudrate namely the COM3 of CPU The default baudrate is 9600 in CPU EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC zont g Basic Setting Hetwork Server Channels Channell Hostlistl Serial Settir Conmectionl Password Setting Apply Settings Rest Log Out Worked As S eryer Remote Host 192 168 0 214 Remote Fort 5001 s Local Fort mtata Ta E UKE Connect Response WeeHostlist On DSR Drop Check EOT Hard Disconnect Het Frotocol Start Character Ox DHS Query Period 1800 4 Flush Input Buffer With Active Connect T Hith Passive Connect At Timeot Disconnect Flush Output Buffer With Active Connect Hith Passive Connect Inactivity Timeout l3 At Timeof Disconnect ee Connection settings ELC 22DC DA R N can work as either server or client Net Protocol TCP Worked As Server Client Remote Host The remote PC IP address while working as client CPU will automatically get connected to such remote host Active connect AutoStart Remote Port the remote port while working as client CPU will get connected to remote host with such port Local Port the local port while working as server the client shall be connected with the CP
6. xLogic Micro PLC ii wae 7 Basic Setting A Hetwork IF Configuration Server F Channels a MM Channel 1 192 168 0 18 o F Hostlistl BOOT Enable IF Address U o M Serial Setting DHCF Enable SEAE eos 55 755 0 i vw Commectiont Auto IF Enable Password Setting Gateway 192 168 0 1 lApply Settings Resta DHCF Host Hame i Log Out Preferred IHS Server Ban hb ddesn er lanes 1420 7 1 l Work as Client Remote Host 192 168 0 16 Remote port 5001 F Network Het Protocol forked As Client vw Active Connect AutoS tart HN E i h Ba 14 m H E 3 F Channel Hostlistl Remote Host 192 168 0 16 Start Character Ox ic w Serial Setting 7 Remote Fort 5001 m DHE Query Feriod 1800 Password Setting Apply Settings Resta Local Fort S000 4 Flush Input Buffer Loz Dut fith Active Connect Tes ag Ou Connect Response fith Passive Connect Tes WeeHostlist Tes At Timeof Disconnect Yes Om TIRES BEES Tes Flush Output Buffer Check EOT Tas With Active Connect Tes PLC address need be changed to 2 default is 1 Change the CPU address with the panel key Eo m Press E and then press Press AaLi address with UP or DOWN button and confirm with OK Change Regarding the program We need realize the below logic 1 11 IA in master to control the Q1 QA in slavel amp salve2 if I1 is ON in master the corresponding Q1 in salves is ON I2 is ON in master t
7. xLogic Micro PLC User s Manual CE YX Easy Electronic Co Ltd xLogie Micro PLC Contents lt Introduction lt Getting started lt Installation and wiring lt Programming xLogic Configuring amp software lt Applications Technical data EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC Introduction Congratulations with your xLogic Micro PLC provided by Easy Electronic Co Ltd The xLogic Micro PLC is a compact and expandable CPU replacing mini PLCs multiple timers relays and counters The xLogic Micro PLC perfectly fits in the space between timing relays and low end PLCs Each CPU incorporates not only a real time clock and calendar but also provides support for optional expansion I O modules to enhance control and monitoring applications Data adjustments can easily be performed via the keypad the LCD display or through the easy to use xLogic soft DIN rail and panel mounted options are both available offering full flexibility to the various installation needs of your application The xLogic Micro PLC is available in 120V 240V AC or 12V and 24V DC versions making it the ideal solution for relay replacement or simple control applications as building and parking lot lighting managing automatic lighting access control watering systems pump control ventilation systems home automation and a wide field of other applications demanding low cost to be a primary design issue We strongly recomm
8. xLogie Micro PLC Analog comparator Ax Ay Analog trigger Ax Analog amplifier Ax Analog multiplexer AQ Analog ramp AQ Analog math AQ PI controller AQ Data latching relay AQ Up Down counter Cnt You select the required function via the block number Time base can be adjusted The value of T can be set modified in parameter mode For information about how to modify refer to chapter 5 2 2 please For information on the validity and accuracy of the time base refer to the xLogic time base list as follows Valid ranges of the time base if T parameter o P sooo h hours 99 59 The display in programming mode example Valid ranges of the time base if T Actual value of an already programmed function EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC ms 99990 Numberofms f t0ms so s999 Numberofs ts O mo 999 Numberofmin tmin The display in programming mode example If the referenced block B6 in the example returns a value that lies out of the valid range the value is rounded up or down to the next valid value Parameter preset Actual value of an already programmed function How to include the actual value of an already programmed function 1 Press to move the cursor to the equal sign of parameter T B12 WR o B12 R T 04 10h T 204 10h twice 2 Press Y to change the equal sign into an arrow If it exists the last referenced block and its time
9. 4 3 Select function page Press ESC key to change from running mode to function page L M WW l2 13 14 16 16 I 18 19 l IB IC ID 114115 116 00 6 6 66 6 6 6 6 6 0000 010 EASY ELC 2600 DA4 F FP OOOO OOOO O00 00000 L a E al E al a E a L al m aen E al E l 01 gz g3 g4 Q5 gE a PE gg gio After pressing ESC key xLogic would be switched to function page and meanwhile open function menu as figure below shows User Manual xLogic Micro PLC L M WW l2 3 14 15 16 I7 18 19 JA IB IC ID H4115 116 E E E E E E EE E E E EEE E SE T EASY ELC 26DC DA F POO ODO OO 000 L L d L ad L ad L ad L l L ad L ad L ad 9 EE ga EE g5 QE EF gA FE 010 Brief introduction on 5 options of function page Run stop Select this menu to switch over xLogic status between RUN and Stop Refer to chapter4 3 1 for details Set Param To set function block parameter Refer to chapter 4 3 2 for details Set Used to set modify password set address of CPU amp extension LCD settings and communication parameters settings refer to chapter 4 3 3 and 4 3 4 for details please L Pressi or Y key to move the cursor to Set 2 Then press OK key xLogic will display as follows L M oo l2 13 14 15 16 I7 18 19 IA IB IC ID 1141516 016 6 6 6 6 6 6 66 6 6 66 616 fy too at ENSA ELC 260C DA A To set and modify date and time Refer to chapter 4 3 5 for details Menu Language To change the lan
10. Analog Inputs DC 0 10V Td EH ODOOOODOG00 L Sirr Hay EL oOooodo0000000 The above figure shows how to make a four wire current measurement Connect two wire sensor to ELC E AI 1 37 ar Man al EASY xLogie Micro PLC Two wire sensor wiring is as follows 1 Connect the output of the sensor to the I terminal 0 20mMA current measurement of ELC E AI I module 2 Connect the attached connector of the sensor to the 24V L of power supply 3 Connect the current output terminal M to the corresponding M terminals M1 M2 M3 of ELC E AI 1I ELC E PT100 It can be connected with one two wire or three wire resistance type thermocouple When two wire technology applied the terminals M1 and IC1 this rule also shall be applied to M2 and IC2 M3 and IC3 would be short connected Such connection can not compensate error tolerance caused by the resistance in measurement loop The measurement error of 1 Q impedance of power cord is proportional to 2 5 C The three wire technology can inhibit the influence of measurement results caused by cable length ohmic resistance peliel pine Pi O0000000000 QO000000000 Ooo 9000000000 Oo0000000000 3 4 3 Connecting xLogic Outputs 1 Requirement for the relay output Various loads such as lamp fluorescent tube motor contact etc can be connected to the outputs of xLogic The maximum ON output current that ca
11. S Workspace Info Window Hmi Window Zoom 7 Monit Data All 0 000000 2010 05 25 10 15 43 0406 A1002 0 000000 2010 05 25 10 15 43 0406 C Only One A1003 0 000000 2010 05 25 10 15 43 0406 r Al0O1 1000 000000 2010 05 25 10 15 43 0906 Al002 8 000000 2010 05 25 10 15 43 0906 Al003 7 000000 2010 05 25 10 15 43 0906 Al001 1000 000000 2010 05 25 10 15 44 0406 AlI002 8 000000 2010 05 25 10 15 44 0406 Al003 7 000000 2010 05 25 10 15 44 0406 Al001 1000 000000 2010 05 25 10 15 44 0906 AlI002 8 000000 2010 05 25 10 15 44 0906 Al003 7 000000 2010 05 25 10 15 44 0906 AINNI 1NA AANAANN 2010 05 25 101545 NANA Export to Excel Exbonyg fo Excey 4 Click to transfer data into one excel file it contains AI1 AQ number value and the corresponding time 1 Walue IncIO Name IO Value Value Time 1 ATOO1 0 2010 05 26 10 00 34 o234f l 3 2 AI002 0 2010 05 25 10 00 34 0234 Ep 3 AI003 0 2010 05 25 10 00 34 0234 5 4 ATOO1 1000 2010 05 25 10 00 34 0734 6 5 AI002 7 2010 05 25 10 00 34 0734 6 AI003 6 2010 05 25 10 00 34 0734 8 7 aAIOo1 1000 2010 05 25 10 00 35 0234 Ea 8 AI002 7 2010 05 25 10 00 35 0234 10 9 AI003 6 2010 05 25 10 00 35 0234 10 AI0D1 1000 2010 05 25 10 00 35 0734 12 11 AIO02 7 2010 05 25 10 00 35 0734 13 12 AIO03 6 2010 05 25 10 00 35 0734 13 AIO01 1000 2010 05 25 10 00 36 0234 14 AIO02 7 2010 05 25 10 00 36 0234 15 AIO03 6 2010 05 25 10 00 36 0234 16 AIOO1 1000
12. 1039 EXT2 1040 1047 ELC 22 26 CPU 1024 1031 EXT1 1032 1039 EXT2 1040 1047 EASY User Manual xXLOGIC filler PLG eee EXM 12 Signed short R W j mpfi ELC 12 Series 1280 1535 CPU 1280 1281 EXT1 1282 1283 Py EXT2 1284 1285 ELC 18 Series 512 531 CPU 512 513 EXT1 514 515 EXT2 516 517 ELC 22 26 Upgraded ELC 18 Series CPU 1280 1281 EXT1 1282 1283 EXT2 1284 1285 Analog quantity buffer ELC 6 amp Economic Signed short AM shows the current ELC 12 Series value of the function 1536 1599 B005 AM5 EXM 12 it B006 AM6 ELC 12 Series 1536 2074 ELC 18 Series 768 1023 ELC 22 26 Upgraded ELC 18 Series 1536 2074 EASY xLogie Micro PLC Analog quantity buffer ELC 6 amp Economic Signed short R W reining a ELC 12 Series 3072 3103 ELC 12 Series 3072 3135 ELC 18 Series 1280 1311 ELC 22 26 Upgraded ELC 18 Series 3072 3135 The frequency value Word buffer of threshold EXM 12 ELC 22 26 U trigger pgraded ELC 18 Series pu Standard ELC 12 J i Series 2560 3071 ELC 18 Series 1024 1279 All ELC series CPU Signed short R W Year Month Day Hour Minute Second EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC Appendix A Technical data A 1 General technical data Criterion Tested in accordance Values with ELC 18 Series Main Module 95 x 90 x 55 mm Dimensions WxHxD oe Approx 350g Weight on a 35 mm profile rail or wall Installation mounting ELC 12 Serie
13. 6 relays 10 A with resistive load 2 A with inductive load External fuse required 2 Hz with resistive load 0 5 Hz with inductive load lt 0 1 ms function Yes typ 10 h 12 digital none 12 24V DC 10 8 V 28 8 V DC max 3 V DC 1mA min 8 V DC 1 5 mA 6 transistors PNP 0 3 A External fuse required 10Hz lt 0 1 ms function Yes typ 10 h 12 digital 8 0 to 10V 12 24V DC 10 8 V 28 8 V DC max 3 V DC ImA min 8 V DC 1 5 mA 6 transistors PNP 0 3 A External fuse required 10Hz lt 0 1 ms function Yes typ 10 h 12 digital none 12 24V DC 10 8 V 28 8 V DC max 3 V DC 1mA min 8 V DC 1 5 mA 6 transistors NPN 0 3 A External fuse required 10Hz lt 0 1 ms function Yes typ 10 h 12 digital 8 0 to 10V 12 24V DC 10 8 V 28 8 V DC max 3 V DC ImA min 8 V DC 1 5 mA 6 transistors NP N 0 3 A External fuse required 10Hz lt 0 1 ms function Yes typ 10h xLogie Micro PLE User Manual EZZ xLogic Micro PLC Inputs of which can be used in analog mode Input supply voltage Permissible range with signal 0 with signal 1 Input current Outputs Continuous current Short circuit protection Switching frequency Cycle time Integrated time switches pow
14. Particular characteristics to be noted when configuring Block name Priority fi Acknowledge Message i BO03 0n Delay 1 EE eee 2 F B005 0n Delay BOOG On Delay Ml 3007 0n Delay n BO13 On Delay Current Time On Delay Current time Current date Hessage enable time Bessage enable date 1 General area Here you will find the following settings e Priority of the message text EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC Check box for message text acknowledgement Blocks area Shows a list of all the circuit program blocks and their parameters General parameters area Shows general parameters such as the current date Block parameters area Shows the parameters of a block selected from the Blocks area which you can output in the message text Messages area You arrange the message text in this area Information entered in this area corresponds with that on the xLogic display Delete button Button for deleting entries from the Messages area Special characters button Button for inserting special characters in the Messages area To arrange the message text From the Blocks area select the block whose parameters you want to output Drag and drop the parameters required from the Block parameters to the Messages area You may also use the Insert button to do so In the Messages area you ca
15. be You can use the selection tool to select and move blocks text and connecting lines You can select objects individually with a left click you can select multiple objects with Ctrl Click or you can use the mouse as a lasso to surround objects with a rectangle and capture them as a selection You can call the selection tool in any other tool by pressing the ESC key or by clicking on the icon in the programming toolbar Text Tool A This tool is used to insert or edit user defined text objects in the programming interface You can specify the font type font size and font color for each individual label Text figures can be set in Wrap Text format You can adjust the size of a text figure typically by dragging the rectangle handles Cut Join z This tool is used to cut and join connections between blocks To cut a connection left click to select the relevant line while the Cut Join tool is active The connection is replaced at the blocks by a reference to the partner block The reference is labeled with the page number block number and the I O of the partner block EASY xLogie Micro PLC 6 8 4 Simulation Tool and status window A A toolbox pops up when you open the simulation mode It contains e Icons e g switches for operator control of the inputs e An icon for the simulation of a power failure for testing the switching response with reference to retentivity characteristics after power failur
16. m g Max Current time Current date Hessage enable time Hessage enable date T Protectio 1 select TX or Rx and insert into the screen 2 You can edit the text in the screen such as TX RX Block name Ene eT English Priority fi Acknowledge Message Message Text MW Show Farameters C ID amp Blocks C AI C Ag CF O AF CM O aM ote Toe pee Parameter EASY xLogie Micro PLC So you can view the communication status on the LCD even if there are no indicators on the ELC RS232 ELC USB PRO RS485 If there is data transmission the status of the com port on the LCD will be flashing 6 5 46 Astronomical clock Short description The astronomical clock SFB is used to set an output high between sunrise and sunset based on the local time at the geographical location of the xLogic devices The output status of this function block also depends on the configuration of summer time wintertime conversion Connection Description Parameter The location info including longitude latitude and time zone Output Q Q is set to hi when sunrise time is reached It holds this state until sunset time is reached Parameters EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC Parameter Comment Block name Location User defined Location Info Mame PO Longitude le WEN o 2 321 n Latitude ju BSI say ray i Time Zone E v amta Save P
17. none External fuse required none xLogic Micro PLC Degree of IP20 protection Certification CE Mounting On 35 mm standard mounting rail 4 MW or wall mounting Dimensions W X H X D 48 x 90 x 64 mm Inputs 2 pti00 50 4 0 4 20MmA No No C 200 C Input supply voltage 12 24V DC 12 24V DC 15 24V DC 12 24V DC Outputs No No 2 0 to 10V 2 0 to 20mA Resolution 0259C 10 bit 10 bit 10 bit standardized to 0 standardized to O0 standardized to O 1000 1000 1000 Connection cables 2x1 5 mm orl x 2 5 mm Ambient temperature O to 55 C Storage temperature 410 S16 Wey ae 710 Se Degree of protection IP20 Certification CE Mounting On 35 mm standard mounting rail 4 MW or wall mounting Dimensions W X H X D 48 x 90 x 64 mm Communication module for ELC 12 CPU Input supply voltage Description Short circuit protection Connection cables Ambient temperature Storage temperature Degree of protection Certification Mounting Dimensions ELC12 E RS485 12 24V DC isolated 485 converter used to bring out the terminals of RS485 port built in ELC 12 series CPU for connection with third party devices External fuse required ELC12 E Ethernet DC Discontinued 12 24V DC Ethernet connecting to ELC 12 CPU module units DC type External fuse required 2x1 5 mm ori x 2 5 mm Oto t 559C O OC tor 70C IP20 CE xLogie Micro PLC e ELC12 E Ethe
18. 08 0J 010 If you want to set the time further please move the cursor to Set Time menu then press OK key L M WW l2 13 i4 16 IB TF 18 19 lA IB IC ID H4115 116 00 000 00 000 0000 000 m nT ih Ser EAS U ELC 26D0C D 4 F Here you can set week day From Monday to Sunday and the clock The method is similar to above After completion of your setup press OK key L M o l2 l3 l4 I5 I6 I7 19 lA IB IC IO 114115 6 0000 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 0 00 0 0 hy ee BAS U ELC 26DC D 4 F Press ESC key and return to FUNCTION PAGE Chapter 5 Programming via panel key Note 1 Now From 8 Aug 2014 all series xlogic cannot support key pad programming function anymore because we need more memory for external new function blocks But if keypad programming function is required for some special customers we still can supply the firmware update package to them Please contact us Getting started with xLogic Programming refers to creating a circuit program from the xLogic Basic module User Manual xLogic Micro PLC this chapter you will learn how to use xLogic to create the xLogic circuit programs for your application ae ee m amp xLogicSoft is the xLogic programming software that you can use on your PC to quickly and easily create test modify save and print the circuit programs The topics in this manual however relate only to the creation of circuit programs on the actual xLogic Basic modu
19. 12 24V DC 10 8 V 28 8 V DC max 3 V DC 1mA 10 V DC 1 5 min mA 4 transistors NPN 0 3 A External fuse required 10 Hz lt 0 1 ms function Yes typ 100 h xLogic Micro PLC Ambient temperature Storage temperature Degree of protection Certification Mounting Dimensions Programming cable xLogic lt gt xLogic communication RS485 xLogic lt gt network Ethernet Third party device HMI lt gt xLogic Maximum program memory Data logging Extensions High speed input High output PWM HMI speed Model instruction 200 oo CC 40 C to 70 C IP20 CE On 35 mm standard mounting rail 4 MW or wall mounting WxHxD 72 x 90 x 68 mm PC cable RS232 or USB Yes Yes Yes modbus 512 blocks Yes ELC MEMORY Yes No No optional PC cable RS232 PC cable RS232 or USB or USB Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes modbus 512 blocks Yes ELC MEMORY Yes I5 16 14KHZ I7 18 60KHZ No optional Yes modbus 512 blocks Yes ELC MEMORY Yes I5 16 14KHZ I7 18 60KHZ No optional PC cable RS232 or USB Yes Yes Yes modbus 512 blocks Yes ELC MEMORY Yes 15 16 14KHZ 17 18 60KHZ Q3 Q4 333Hz optional ELC 12AC R HMI ELC 12AC R ELC HMI ELC 12AC R CAP ELC 12AC R ELC COVER ELC 12DC DA R HMI ELC 12DC DA R ELC HMI ELC 12DC DA R CAP ELC 12DC DA R ELC COVER ELC 12DC DA TN HMI ELC 12DC DA TN ELC HM
20. 12 digital none 12 24V DC 10 8 V 28 8 V DC max 3 V DC imA min 8 V DC 1 5 mA 6 relays 10 A with resistive load 2 A with inductive load External fuse required 2 Hz with resistive load 0 5 Hz with inductive load lt 0 1 ms function Yes typ 100 h 2x1 5 mm or1x2 5 mm Oto 59 C 40 OC to 70 C IP20 CE 12 digital 8 0 to 10V 12 24V DC 10 8 V 28 8 V DC max 3 V DC 1mA min 8 V DC 1 5 mA 6 relays 10 A with resistive load 2 A with inductive load External fuse required 2 Hz with resistive load 0 5 Hz with inductive load lt 0 1 ms function Yes typ 100 h On 35 mm standard mounting rail 4 MW or wall mounting W X H X D 95 x 90 x 58 mm PC cable RS232 or USB Yes PC cable RS232 or USB Yes PC cable RS232 or USB Yes 12 digital none 12 24V DC 10 8 V 28 8 V DC max 3 V DC 1mA min 8 V DC 1 5 mA 6 transistors PNP 0 3 A External fuse required 10Hz lt 0 1 ms function Yes typ 100 h PC cable RS232 or USB Yes 12 digital 8 0 to 10V 12 24V DC 10 8 V 28 8 V DC max 3 V DC 1mA min 8 V DC 1 5 mA 6 transistors PNP 0 3 A External fuse required 10Hz lt 0 1 ms function Yes typ 100 h PC cable RS232 or USB Yes 12 digital none 12 24V DC 10 8 V 28 8 V DC max 3 V DC ImA min 8 V DC 1 5 mA
21. After you finish the edit you can start the function of simulation operation to examine program to see if it performs your control logic or not Operation Method 1 Click Simulation under the menu Tools with left button of the mouse It s time to start program of simulation or click in the simulation toolbar with mouse and it also can open simulation operation interface It shows as Fig 11 9 EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC Fig 7 10 6 Start simulation 2 Click input block with mouse It can change the state of input state displays ON and OFF in the output point of the module so you can observe the state of input or output oy I loo 1002 1003 gdi 000z 000z 004 3 Click Ty button again to terminate the operation function of the module Fig 7 10 7 Simulation Operation Attn In above graph you can see ON or OFF state of input and output and the output state and the current state of timing and counting of all blocks Through this simulation operation graph you can exam ma User Man EASY xLogie Micro PLC the program to see if it performs control requirement or not 6 11 Save and Print Operation method of file saving 1 To save a Program click option save or Save As under menu File with left button of the mouse as shown in Fig 7 10 8 or click button Fi under toolbar 2 You can set up saving path
22. Ei under toolbar b Click button ES with left button of mouse start upload Program uploading status shown as Fig 7 10 14 display upload Program course 6 13 On line monitoring test circuit program After you are satisfied with your program simulation and have downloaded it to xLogic CPU you can also perform an online test of the circuit program An online test is similar to simulation in that you can view inputs and outputs and block parameters It differs however in that you are testing the program running in the xLogic with live inputs rather than testing the program on the PC with simulated inputs Multiple registers can be accessed individually by clicking Tools gt Set Monitor Config Konit Config Supervisory Type m W M W AM W Analog Inputihitpit SMS Message Input Output Registers E Frequency Save Analog Input Cutput Data Save Digital Inpat Chtput Data Monitor mode EASY xLogie Micro PLC ii Ea e ili Bw of Under monitor mode user can change the spare output the input pin of Q is not connected to other blocks state via xLogicsoft HE je Mi e of oa Cut Ctrlti Copy Ctrltel Delete Del Select All Ctrlta Properties Right click Q2 and then click Set Output State User Manual xLogic Micro PLC Click OK button and the Q2 of xLogic will be turned off How to transfer monitor
23. 12 24V DC 10 8 V 28 8 V DC max 3 V DC ImA min 8 V DC 1 5 mA 8 transistors NPN 0 3 A External fuse required 10Hz lt 0 1 ms function Yes typ 100 h PC cable RS232 or USB xLogie Micro PLC User Manual EEE xLogic Micro PLC Ethernet CPU Units Inputs of which can be used in analog mode Input supply voltage Permissible range with signal 0 with signal 1 Input current Outputs Continuous current Short circuit protection Switching frequency Cycle time Integrated time switches power reserve Connection cables Ambient temperature Storage temperature Degree of protection Certification Mounting Dimensions Programming cable xLogic lt gt xLogic communication RS485 xLogic lt gt network Ethernet Third party device HMI lt gt xLogic Maximum program memory Data logging Extensions High speed input RTC HMI Ethernet Port ELC 22DC DA R N 14 digital 8 0 to 10V 12 24V DC 10 8 V 28 8 V DC max 3 V DC 1mA min 10 V DC 1 5 mA 8 relays 10A ELC 12DC DA R N 8 digital 4 0 to 10V 4 relays 10A ELC 12AC R N ELC 22AC R N 8 digital 14 digital NO NO 85 265 V AC 100 253 V DC max 40 V AC 0 03 mA min 79 V AC 0 08 mA 4 relays 10A 8 relays 10A 10 A with resistive load 2 A with inductive load External fuse required 2 Hz with r
24. 168 0 16 IPConfiguration User Config BOOTP Enable DHCP Enable Auto IP Enable Subnet Gateway 255 255 255 0 DHCP Host Name 192 168 0 1 Het Protocol TCP Yorke Remote Host Server v ctive Connect AutoStart 192 168 0 132 Start Character Ox 0 Remote Port Local Port VWseHostlist On DSR Drop Check EOT Hard Disconnect Connect Response 5000 A e 5866 A v ies A Inactivity Timeoutt gt 15 B DNS Query Period 1800 Flush Input Buffer ith Active Connect With Passive Connect At Timeof Disconnect Flush Output Buffer With Active Connect With Passive Connect At Timeof Disconnect Po Make Exportable Clo A ii lv 6 Click Connect to PLC button and then the Ethernet module and PC will be linked 7 3 How to establish the communication among CPUs via Ethernet Hardware connection Internet IP address Easy 192 168 0 17 oa ay ina a Work as client Move cdiress 2 iii x Remote host IP 192 168 0 16 Remote port 5001 IP address Work as Server Slave address 2 IP address 192 168 0 18 192 168 0 16 Local Port Work as client 5001 Remote host IP 192 168 0 16 Remote port 5001 Step A First you need use the device manger to configure the LAN connection Example Master PLC works as server Its IP addre
25. 250 Accuracy of T Because of slight tolerances in the characteristics of electronic components the set time T may deviate The xLogic has a maximum tolerance of 0 02 When 0 02 of the time T is smaller than 0 02 seconds the maximum deviation is 0 02 seconds Example The maximum tolerance per hour 3600 seconds is 0 02 which is proportional to 0 72 seconds The maximum tolerance per minute 60 seconds is 0 02 seconds Accuracy of the timer weekly yearly timer The maximum timing in accuracy is 5 s day 6 4 3 Backup of the real time clock Because the internal real time clock of an xLogic is backed up it continues operation after a power failure The ambient temperature influences the backup time At an ambient temperature of 25 C the typical backup time of xLogic is 100 hours 6 4 4 Retentivity The switching states and counter values of SFs can be set retentive This means that current data is retained after a power failure and that the block resumes operation at the break point The timer is not reset but resumes operation until the time to go has expired for example to enable this response however EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC Ae relevant functions must be set retentive R The data is retained Current data is not retained default See the section in topic Second circuit program on enabling and disabling retentivity SFs hours counter weekly timer yearly timer and PI con
26. 4 0 10V 4 digital digital I9 ID Standard ELC 26 Series CPU Units AC 110 240V DC12V DC24V 8 digital analog I1 18 8 DC12V DC24V digital 19 IF 8 digital analog 11 18 8 DC12V DC24V digital 19 IF 8 digital analog 11 18 8 DC12V DC24V digital 19 IF AC 110 240V 16 digital DC12V DC24V 16 digital 8 digital analog 1I1 18 8 DC12V DC24V digital 19 IF 8 digital analog 11 18 8 DC12V DC24V digital 19 IF 8 digital analog 11 18 8 DC12V DC24V digital 19 IF Standard SSR 12 Series CPU Units 4 relays 10A Economic SSR 12 Series CPU Units 16 digital 16 digital xLogie Micro PLC transistors NPN 10 relays 10A 10 relays 10A 10 relays 10A 10 transistors PNP 10 transistors NPN 10 relays 10A 10 relays 10A 10 relays 10A 10 transistors PNP 10 transistors NPN 4 relays 10A 2 14KHZ 2 60KHZ Max 14kHz IB IC Max 60k Hz Max 14kHz IB 1C Max 60k Hz 19 IA Max 14kHz IB 1C Max 60k Hz 19 IA Max 14kHz IB 1C Max 60k Hz 19 IA Max 14kHz IB 1C Max 60k Hz VI9 IA Max 14kHz IB IC Max 60k Hz I9 IA Max 14kHz IB IC Max 60k Hz I9 IA Max 14kHz IB IC Max 60k Hz I9 IA Max 14kHz IB IC Max 60k Hz lt M wn yes no yes 5 Q6 2ch Q 5 Q6 2ch Q 5 Q6 YES YES YES 2ch Q YES 5 Q6 2ch Q
27. C Program FilessE457SELCsoft sLogicy 0 747 oolkitProd 121 vc60 dll eel 8 The installation is finished You can start the xLogicsoft immediately or later by double clicking the icon on the desktop EASY You now see the complete user interface of xLogicsoft The programming interface for creating your circuit programs occupies the greater part of the screen The icons and logical links of the circuit program fE Setup ELCsoft i fm x Completing the ELCsoft Setup Wizard Setup has finished installing ELCsoft on your computer The application may be launched by selecting the installed icons Click Finish to exit Setup PN rrr r r are arranged on this programming interface To help you to maintain an overview of large circuit programs the right side and the bottom of the programming interface contains scroll bars which you can use for vertical and horizontal scrolling of the circuit program EASY xLogie Micro PLC ELCsoft xLogic 2 0 P double click User Manual xLogic Micro PLC om File Edit Tools SMS Yiew Help a ee tene TEA AEE desert is mz M ar nput Sms Message Output 4 Sms Wessage Forward Tiser On Delay Off Delay On O E Delay Retentive on Delay Wiping relay pulse outps Edge triggered wiping re lll Asynchronous Pulse Gener Rendon Generator s locks report us
28. C E E E E E eee O O O O a a 8 ELC 26DC DA F M 1 12 13 14 15 16 I 16 19 IA IB IC ID 114115 116 A E E E E E O O a a O a lt as 43 ELC 26DC DAR Esci ok 010101010 eee0e000000608680 Lf d d d a ee ee ee ee a ee 01 Q2 03 04 05 Q6 Qf 08 QI Q10 COMO RS232 port or programming port ser Manua xLogie Micro PLC COM1 RS485 port For the ELC RS485 and ELC Ethernet module which shall be connected to ELC 18 ELC 22 ELC 26 CPU Customized RS485 or Ethernet module for ELC 12 CPU will also use such port COM2 reserved Customized RS485 or Ethernet module for ELC 18 ELC 22 ELC 26 CPU will also use such port Set Baud rates L M 1 12 13 14 15 16 I 18 19 IA IB IC ID 14115 116 C E D E E O E O O O a O a E a E EASY ELC 26DC D4 F eeee00200060000060000008080 ee a ee ee ee ee ee ee ee a ee 01 Q2 03 04 O05 6 O07 08 093 010 Confirm with OK L M 1 12 13 14 I5 16 I 18 19 JA IB IC ID 1411516 J E E E E E E a O O a O O O a FAS 4 a e 43 ELC 26DC DAR Ge ok 6 6 0 0 0 0 61010 6 6 6 6 6 66 6 6 0 oe ee ee ee es es ee ee ee ee ee es ee ee ee Q1 Q2 03 Q4 5 O06 Q7 O08 gg 010 Change it with pressing Up and Down key And confirm with OK Set Modbus protocol L M 1 12 13 14 15 16 I 18 I9 IA IB IC ID 11411516 eee eeoaooeoeoeoeee0e0008080 FANS 4 D Pr lt 4 as At ELC 26DC DA R Ge ca Confirm with OK User Manual xLogic
29. English xLogie Micro PLC Block nane Character English Priority f2 Message Text c Acknowledge Message E V Show Parameters AAA J ____ ____ a gt Number size 1 P ae Large number 4 bits v C I 70 Blocks C ar C CF C AF ote l p Cee eee decimal and length Block Parameter Animate option Start ELC 26DC DA F 1 This option is for the ELC 43TS touch screen it is used to trigger the pictures saved in the screen you can refer to the ELC 43TS user guide for detail information Message Text g Cc V Animate GIF animation ote Double click Parameter ect you can modify the decimal and length Parameter j Current time Current date Becsarve enahle time 6 5 18 1 How to change parameters of blocks in displayed message Parameters of blocks can be changed in displayed message if inserted into the message text block by press OK key for 3 seconds Step as follows A Insert the parameters of block into message text Here is On delay EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC Parasetar ent Tise fon Up Uown counter a Hours Counter Threshold trigger cer Analog bf Analog comparator fan Analog threshold an Analog Amplifier eee Analog watchdog BB Analog differenti Analog MUX pes PI controller saa Analog Ramp ae Analog Math
30. For further information on the protection mode refer to the topic Parameter protection For further information on retentivity refer to the topic Retentivity You can modify the protection mode and retentivity setting only in programming mode This is not possible in parameter assignment mode In this manual the protection mode or and retentivity R or settings are only shown in the displays where these can actually be changed Verification of the circuit program This program branch for Q1 is now completed xLogic shows you the output Q1 You can once again view the circuit program on the display Use the keys to browse the circuit program that is press or to move from block to block and to move between the inputs at a block Closing the programming mode Although you were shown how to exit the programming mode when you created your first circuit program here is a reminder 1 Return to the programming menu Press ESC 2 Return to the main menu Press ESC 3 Move the gt cursor to Start Press or 4 Confirm Start Press OK xLogic is back in RUN mode EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC 5 5 7 Deleting a block Let us assume you want to delete the connection of block B2 from your circuit program and connect B1 directly to Q1 Bi Proceed as follows 1 Switch xLogic to programming mode as a reminder refer to the topic The four golden rules for operating xLogic 2 Sele
31. M2 B003 M3 REGO REG1 REG2 Rem Off Rem Off MI 0 00 00s On 0 OT 0h 0 f 0 Q gt 0 R En Start 0 M1 M512 0 511 F AI analog inputs ATOOL es G AQ analog outputs EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC AGOI AQ21 AQ22 4 5 G AF analog flag AF1 AF1 AF256 OnZ2Z50 I AM AM value it can be used to display the current value of analog blocks which has analog output pin BOO1 AM1 B002 AM2 BOOS AM3 Gain 1 00 1 O V1 O Offset 0 y2 0 REG2 Point 0 3 0 y2 0 4 0 REG2 Point 0 3 0 REG2 4 0 Point 0 1 2 443 4 AM1 AM512 0 511 EXAMPLE 4 i ra L r H J Peed Sa fisnor fritir td Ein rey as l m ri e Pesi Pannen ms be it al i ci tae Basch ome Fils Farma Pils Fas Eme Berri Tiga Ai i File trite Mei ippeed oT tee Baried Time aml pox La Saperatar 1 Fil fins i ia miii vi gt OA bihar Beery Pall jst Wes uae his ea Bapor Farma T ka ei Feiss 5 Bepiniar r Peruesce Beia rpe p n j 5 hile wa p Cmi po wal I EASY xLogie Miero PLC Mir i Please refer the property dialog box of B003 it can record the output status The start address is from 0 a and it must record the 20 outputs with continuous addresses And the record file shows below 2011 01 30 13 54 25 O1 Q11 1 1 11LOU001 000000000004 2011 01 30 13 54 3
32. On delay REM Off delay On Off delay Retentive on delay Wiping relay pulse out Edge triggered wiping relay Asynchronous pulse generator Random generator Stairway lighting switch Multiple function switch xLogie Micro PLC Weekly timer Yearly timer Up down counter Hours counter REM Threshold trigger Analog threshold trigger Analog differential trigger Analog comparator Analog value monitoring Analog amplifier Analog multiplexer Pulse Width Modulator PWM Analog math Analog ramp PI controller Analog math error detection Latching relay Pulse relay Message texts User Manual xLogic Micro PLC SS Softkey Shift register Data latching relay Modbus Write Memory Write Memory Read o ee 6 5 1 On delay Short description The output is not switched on until a configured delay time has expired Connection peser ooo o oO Trg input The on delay time is triggered via the Trg Trigger input Parameter T represents the on delay time after which the output is switched on output signal transition O to 1 Retentivity on the status is retentive in memory Q switches on after a specified time T has expired provided Trg is still set Parameter T The time for parameter T can also be preset based on the actual value of another already configured function You can use the actual values of the following functions ar Manual EASY 107
33. P controller Integral action controller I controller Differential action controller D controller we re not touching on this here These are combined for a real controller For instance the PI controller P Controller A proportional action controller P controller changes the manipulated variable M proportional to the loop error The P controller works immediately By itself it cannot drive the loop error to zero Men Kp j Pn tl Fn Manipulated variable of the P controller at the time n Kp Gain of the P controller Loop error at the time n The following picture shows a jump in process value and step response of the controller User Manual EASY xLogie Micro PLC Py M lo Summary The P controller has the following characteristics It cannot correct faults with the control process gt lasting loop error It reacts immediately to a change in the process value It is stable I Controller An integral action controller I controller changes the manipulated variable M proportional to the loop error and to the time The I controller works by delayed action It completely remedies a loop error In order to calculate the value of the manipulated variable at a period of time n the time up until this period of time must be divided into small time slices The loop errors at the end of each time slice must be added up integrated and they are then entered in the calculation Makia Tete te te ste at te
34. Pia me ce restr mar H Convert the counter value 5 to Q1 Q2 and F1 F14 0000000000000101 6 5 39 Bit to Word Short description This special function is used to transfer the 16 Bit status O or 1 F or Q to word type data AF or AQ Input En Enable this function Input R Reset output AQ with a signal at input R Reset Retentivity set on the value is retentive in memory when power lost AQ will output the value of the block when En was activated For example Transfer the F1 F3 and Q1 status to the AQOO1 Fi is saved in BitO F2 is saved in Bit1 F3 is saved in Bit2 Q1 is saved in Bit3 xLogie Micro PIL a a E H O oO re e oO oO H ry UJ ele lel e N Notes 1 The Bit4 Bit15 was not ticked they are all recognized as 0 2 With such block you can realize to modify one bit of the word register in the slave devices together with the code 06 16 in Modbus network 6 5 40 Stopwatch Short description The stopwatch records the time elapsed since it was enabled Input En En Enable is the monitoring input xLogic sets the current elapsed time to 0 and begins counting elapsed time when En transitions from 0 to 1 When En transitions from 1 to O0 the elapsed time is frozen Input Lap A positive edge 0 to 1 transition at input Lap pauses the stopwatch and sets out
35. RS Lighting When the input I1 has a pulse the output Q1 will be on or off Automatic stairway lighting system momentary switch I1 T 06 00m Ql Lighting If input I1 has a pulse the output Q1iwill be on and keep 6 minutes then be off Apply xLogic to realize multiple switches EASY xLogie Micro PLC switch I1 A Ty Tz gl Lighting When the input I1 has a pulse the output Q1 will be on and not off until the period TH be over Keep the momentary switch holding down in period TL the light will be on all the time Select special function The following selection can be done as special function or saving energy sources The lighting flicker before it gets off automatically You can integrate different central control functions Central control off gt gt Central control on emergency button gt Control all lighting or certain single circuitry by lighting control switch gt To control by integrated timer 8 2 Automatic gate In the entrance of supermarket public building bank hospital etc automatic gate is often used The requirement of automatic gate If some people approach to gate it will be opened automatically The gate must remain open until there is no person on the passageway If there is no person on the passageway the gate must be off automatically in a minute EASY User Manual xLogic Mic
36. Save As Save current file to a new path and a new file Print Print a file Print Preview Preview the file printing result Print Setup Setup printing format Property File property page size amp model select Exit Exit the xLogicsoft EASY 6 8 1 2 Edit sMs Library View ee alae Select All Ctrlta Gota appointed Block Froperties All Blocks Fig 10 2 Edit Menu xLogie Micro PLC X Undo Undo the previous step operation and support consecutive operations X Redo Recover the contents undone by the previous step of operation and support consecutive operations X Cut Cut the contents in the area highlighted with the cursor X Copy Copy the contents highlighted with the cursor X Paste Paste the contents cut or copied X Delete Delete various graphic components X Select All Select all the contents in the current window editing box and setup the label X Goto Apponited block Goto the apponited block in the program interface X Property open the property box of the apponited block X Properties all blocks Open all the property boxes of the selected blocks X Phonebook Add Delete phone number into phonebook Refer to the chapter 6 5 2 6 8 1 3 Tools This instruction is mainly used for reading program from xLogic writing program to xLogic diagnosis the communication situation of xLogic program management and simulation and so on The pull down menu of Tools is shown as the fol
37. Timing diagram 5 J OAT L R AT TG LOL Description of the function The latching relay represents a simple binary memory logic The output value depends on the input states and the previous status at the output EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC ogic table of the latching relay When retentivity is enabled the output signal corresponds with the signal status prior to the power failure 6 5 17 Pulse relay Short description The output is set and reset with a short one shot at the input Gonmesion SD eserton You switch output Q on or off with a signal at input Trg Trigger input A one shot at input S Set sets the output to logical 1 A one shot at input R Reset resets the output to logical 0 Parameter Selection RS input R priority or SR input S priority Retentivity set on the status is retentive in memory Q is switched on with a signal at Trg and is reset again at the next Trg pulse if both S and R O User Manual EASY xLogie Micro PLC parameter of Latching relay can be set modified in parameter mode mr Timing diagram Description of the function The status of output Q changes with each 0 to 1 transition at input Trg and if both S and R 0 i e the output is switched on or off Input Trg does not influence the SFB when S 1orR 1 A one shot at input S sets the pulse relay i e the output is set to logical 1 A one shot at input R resets the pul
38. YES 5 Q6 lt oO wn RTC iL AS User Manual 22 yes yes yes yes yes yes YES yes yes yes oOo oO xLogic Micro PLC ma fo fears ecu Jeo i fe e e 2 3 Structure amp dimension 1 ELC 18 Series CPU 1 Power supply 2 Input 3 Program RS232 port 4 HMI LCD panel 5 keypad 6 Expansion RS485 port 7 Output 2 ELC 12 Series CPU ELC 12DC DA R ss 9 OO OO OO 1 ikg igyd 7 Boo 67 9 1 Power supply 2 Input 3 Program RS232 port 4 Extension RS485 port EASY xLogie Micro PLC 5 HMI LCD panel 6 keypad 7 Output Notes 1 Program port RS232 port ELC RS232 ELC USB ELC Copier ELC MEMORY should be inserted in this port 2 Extension port it can be used as 2 RS485 ports ELC12 CB A ELC12 CB B should be inserted in this port 3 ELC 12DC DA R N ELC 12AC R N CPU 1 Power supply 2 Input 3 Program RS232 port 4 Extension RS485 port 5 HMI LCD panel 6 keypad 7 Output 8 Ethernet port program port 4 ELC E Series Expansion Module only use with ELC 18 CPUs 1 2 boga core eurae ELC E 16DC D R OUTPUT 4x 01 4 Rola yida OUTPUT 4x Q5 8 RolayoA 00000000000 gd ig hep hg l2 QOQOOOODDOOO00O ihe 2 het 12 ILZ 12 the 12 1 Power supply 2 Input 3 Connection cable 4 Extension port 5 Output 5 ELC12 E Series Expansion Module also apply to
39. You can connect almost any block to an input of the current block by means of its block number In this way you can reuse the interim results of logical or other operations reduce programming effort save memory space and clean up your circuit layout To do so however you need to know how xLogic has named the blocks Note We advise you to create an organizational program chart You will find this a valuable aid when you EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC eate the circuit program because you can enter in this chart all the block numbers that xLogic assigns Hs By using the xLogicsoft to program xLogic you can directly create a function chart of your circuit program xLogicsoft also allows you to assign eight character names to up to 512 blocks and to view these on the xLogic Display in parameter assignment mode 5 3 From circuit diagram to xLogic program View of a circuit diagram You know of course how a circuit logic is represented in a circuit diagram Nevertheless here is an example Load E1 is switched on and off by means of the switches 51 OR o2 AND 53 Relay K1 picks up when condition 1 OR 52 AND 53 is met Creating this circuit with xLogic In xLogic you create a circuit logic by interconnecting blocks and connectors To create a circuit logic in xLogic start at the circuit output The output is the load or relay that is to be switched Convert the circuit logic into blocks by worki
40. donee Analog Math error Biscellaneous fee Latching Relay a Pulse Relay l ee Message texts Softkey snee Shift register b a ifeyeles gt 2013 01 2517 1 L M 11 12 13 14 15 16 I7 I8 19 IA IB IC O O O O a o a a a Esc ok ELC 18DC D R U JE M D E E E E E Oe LA md LA md L7 l L WJ Lf md C Press ok for 3 seconds and enter into edit mode aLe eee a E AAI CC COC Ct CC Oot D Modify value by pressing arrow keys and confirm with OK key xLogie Micro PLC L mM 14 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 IA IB IC 0 00 0 00 000 OO 0 EASY lt gt SLi i SEn Be C E N E N O L d L ad ee Lf Ci Cad is ie 6 5 19 Softkey En rt Short description This SFB provides the action of a mechanical pushbutton or switch Output Q is set with a O to 1 signal transition at input En Enable and if in addition Status On has been confirmed in configuration mode Parameter Type Sets either a pushbutton action for one cycle ora switching action of the function Status On or Off state that is applied in the initial cycle after program startup is retentivity is not set Retentivity set on the status is retentive in memory Factory state Output Q Output Q remains set 1 as long as En 1 and the status at Default of Type the parameter Type Switch and Status On is Output Q is set for the duration of one cycle if EN 1 and the status at the
41. ia al ia al Databits E Paritybit Mone zomm Type Ethernet HIF Site wae S 1 105 Protocol Medbus ICP gt Data Register Index High Low Tata addr FO l ea E e p Notes 1 When you do not use the MODBUS blocks in your program then ELC 22DC DA R N CPU shall work as slave in this case you can use the SCADA or touch screen to communicate with ELC 22DC DA R N via the LAN port However if MODBUS BLOCKS had been used in your program moreover the communication type comm Type is Ethernet then ELC 22DC DA R N can not work as slave through Ethernet port 2 In your program if the Modbus read write blocks would be used then you can use the ELC 22DC DA R N as the master CPU to communicate with the slave i e xlogic or the devices from other supplier which supports the standard MODBUS TCP communication protocol in Modbus network Chapter 8 Applications In order to let users know the far going application field of xLogic we present a set of application example Each instance includes the circuit program of its original solution and the compare of solution in which xLogic has been applied You can find the following solution EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC Mual function switch Automatic gate entilation system Industry door Daylight lamps Rain water pump Note The application example of xLogic is available free of charge to our clients but we can t make any promise it
42. time as 10 sec or ON all the time The setting way as follows 1 Select Set menu and click OK L M 1 12 13 14 15 16 I7 18 19 JA IB IC ID 14115116 A I E E E a a a a a a a A a a A EAS 4 as 4 ELC 26DC DA R Ge co ee ee0e000020000000000608080 re a a a a a a a a Q1 Q2 B3 Q4 05 QE 07 BS 0I Q10 2 Select Set LCD menu and click OK L M 1 12 13 144 15 16 I 18 19 IA IB IC ID 141516 A E E E E E E E E 8 FIOM cy ELC 26DC DA R Ge ww NOOO OOOO OOOO OOo Lfd Lfd L ee ee ee ee ee a d QI 02 03 04 05 Q6 Q7 08 09 010 3 Select Backlight menu and click OK L M 1 l2 13 14 15 16 I 18 19 JA IB IC ID 14115 116 J E E O O O O O O O a a a E lt a e ar 4 ELC 26DC DA R Esc ok NOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO a ee ee ee a ee ee ee ee ee ee Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 QG Q7 Pi Q3 010 4 Default is 10 seconds and another option is Always On Confirm with OK Modify the contrast User Manual xLogic Micro PLC 1 12 13 14 15 16 I 18 19 IA IB IC ID 114115116 A E E E E E a a O O a a E a a F1 ELC 26DC DA F Confirm with OK L M 1 12 13 14 15 16 I 18 19 JA IB IC ID 114115 116 A E E E E E O a O O a a a a a EASY aema ELC 26DC DA Fi Modify the contrast with a or gt key and confirm with Ok 4 3 6 Set communication parameters Select Set Com menu from the menu Set L M l1 l2 13 14 15 16 I 18 19 IA IB IC ID H4115 16
43. tt ee 7 tr _ _ i i i i i i s Combinations of Inputs Output status Parameters Having connected at least one input you can configure the value of the output in the truth table in the Parameters window The output values can be 0 for the Inactive state and 1 for the Active state Double click to change the Oori By selecting the Output ON if result is TRUE option the output takes the value configured in the truth table By selecting the Output OFF if result is TRUE option the output takes the inverse value of the value configured in the truth table 6 4 Basics on special functions Because of their different input designation you can see right away that there is a difference between the special functions and basic functions SFs contain timer functions retentive functions and various parameter assignment options which allow you to adapt the circuit program to suit your own requirements This section provides you with a brief overview of input designations and with some particular background information on SFs The SFs in particular are described in Chapter7 5 EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC 76 4 1 Designation of the inputs Logical inputs Here you will find the description of the connectors you can use to create a logical link to other blocks or to the inputs of the xLogic unit S Set A signal at input S sets the output to logical 1 R Reset The reset input R tak
44. will be read and save to F1 to F4 EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC BO01 Nodbus Read Parameter Comment Block name Do Slave Address p Communicate Params B 2 m Databits le Paritybit ione Comm Type esss gt TimeOut B os Protocol Modbus RTU Data Register Index ieh Low Command 01 Read Coils Ox X start g address j Aoo F is bit type flag It can be used to receive bit data from slave device Example 2 Get AI value from Slave 2 xLogic with station No 2 and save the data to AQ11 BO01 Modbus Read Paraneter Comment Block name l xLogic station No 2 Communicate Params SS DEn E Databits fe Paritybit fone gt Comm Type rsss TimeOut imo Protocol Woabus RTU Data Register Index ich Low gt Command Jos Read Holding Registers 4x Register addr 256 Count fi AIl address xLogie Micro PLC Data addr Ag g i Note J AGI1 Data addr ES a 2 T A02 Tata addr ag Adll 2 The number setting of Q I AQ are continuous AQ12 cannot be set as AQ 12 and should be set AQ 4 as above figure shows The following table shows how to set Note this table also can be applied for the configuration of Modbus Write function block a Data format instruction Data format AP AT Atl aligned Short EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC g6 5 33 Modbus Write En E My Cj Far Short d
45. 1 transition at input En saves the value of the signal at the analog input Ax This saved process variable is referred to as Aen Both the analog actual values Ax and Aen are multiplied by the value at parameter A gain and parameter B offset is then added to the product i e Ax gain offset Actual value Aen when input En changes from 0 to 1 or Ax gain offset Actual value Ax Output Q is set when the signal at input En 1 and if the actual value at input Ax is out of range of Aen Delta Output Q is reset when the actual value at input Ax lies within the range of Aen Delta or when the Signal at input En changes to lo 6 5 25 Analog differential trigger Short description The output is set and reset depending on a configurable threshold and a differential value You apply the analog signal to be analyzed at input Ax Use the analog inputs AI1 AI8 the analog outputs AQ1 and AQ2 0 10 V is proportional to 0 1000 internal value EASY xLogie Micro PLC Parameter A Gain er al Range of values 10 00 B Zero offset Range of values 10 000 On On threshold Range of values 20 000 Delta Differential value for calculating the off parameter Range of values 20 000 p Number of decimals Range of values 0 1 2 3 Output Q Q is set or reset depending on the threshold and difference values Parameter p number of decimals Applies only to the display of On O
46. 15 C Threshold 15 Off threshold 5 C Threshold 5 Configuration example B3 1 Protection mode On 00015 On threshold Off 00005 __ Off threshold Press p EASY xLogie Micro PLC B3 2 A 00 10 4 Gain B 00030 4 Offset p 0 4 Decimals in the message text if used Reducing the input response of the analog comparator You can selectively delay the output of an analog comparator by means of the On delay and Off delay special functions With on delay output Q is only set if the pulse width of the triggering signal at input Trg analog comparator output is longer than the on delay time Using this method you will obtain a virtual hysteresis and reduce the input response to short signals Function block diagram Al Analog comparator 6 5 22 Analog threshold trigger Short description The output is set or reset depending on two configurable thresholds hysteresis e rtm Input the analog signal to be evaluated at input Ax Use the analog inputs AI1 AI8 the analog outputs AQ1 and AQ2 0 10 V is proportional to 0 1000 internal value EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC Parameter A Gain Range of values 10 00 B Zero offset Range of values 10 000 On On threshold Range of values 20 000 Off Off threshold Range of values 20 000 p Number of decimals Range of values 0 1 2 3 Outpt k is set or reset
47. 15 h No3 Saturday and Sunday 16 30 h to 23 10 h Description of the function Each weekly timer is equipped with three cams You can configure a time hysteresis for each individual cam At the cams you set the on and off hysteresis The weekly timer sets the output at a certain time provided it is not already set The output is reset at a certain time provided it is not already reset A conflict is generated in the weekly timer when the set on time and the set off time at another cam are identical In this case cam 3 takes priority over cam 2 while cam 2 takes priority over cam 1 The switching status of the weekly timer is determined by the status at the No1 No2 and No3 cams Parameter assignment screen form EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC iew of the parameter assignment screen form for example for Cami and the Pulse setting Block B1 Cam 1 v4 PA See Showing hiding parameters Parameter B1 IF protection mode on page 84 D MTWTFSS Weekdays daily On 06 30 lt On time 06 30 h Off 08 00 lt Off time 08 00 h J torm B1 4 Pulse 0ff Pulse setting On or Off Days of the week The prefix D Day has the following meaning e M Monday e T Tuesday e W Wednesday e T Thursday e F Friday e S Saturday e S Sunday Uppercase letters indicate a specific day of the week A indicates no selection for the day of the week On Off times Any time between 00 00 h and 23 59 h is possi
48. 2 RS485 ports built in merely applied to standard ELC 12 Series 1 RS232 port and 1 RS485 port built in merely applied to ELC 18 Series SSR 12 CPU has a RS232 port amp Optional Ethernet connectivity e SMS GSM module for remote control monitoring and alarm e Multiple channels analog inputs available with DC 0 10V signal PT100 signal amp 0 4 20mA e Default Real Time Clock RTC and summer winter timer is available ue User Manual EASY xLogie Micro PLC Backup at Real Time Clock RTC at 25 C 100 hours 10 hours for Standard Economic ELC 18 CPU iy Two channels high speed counting ELC 18 Series CPU 14KHz Upgraded ELC 18 amp ELC 12 22 26 s A Series CPU 60KHz Pre configured standard functions e g on off delays pulse relay and softkey 2 PWM channels 333Hz Retentive memory capability Not applied to ELC 6 amp economic ELC 12 RS232 communication download cable with photo electricity isolation USB communication download cable with photo electricity isolation Programmable capability up to 256 function blocks ELC 18 512 function blocks ELC 12 Mounting via modular 35mm DIN rail or screw fixed mounting plate On line monitor capability Compact design HMI LCD separate installation available e g xLogic can be installed inside cabinet and HMI mounted in it s front panel Datalogging Kinds of analog signals process capacity DC 0 10V 0 4 20mA and PT100 probe in
49. 2 Relays 3A Q1 Q2 2 Relays 10A Q3 Q4 2 Relays 3A Q1 Q2 2 Relays 10A Q3 Q4 4 Transistors PNP 4 Transistors NPN none 2 Channels DC 0 10V Voltage Signal 2 Channels 0 20mMA Current Signal none isolated 485 converter used to bring out the terminals of RS485 port built in ELC 12 series CPU for connection with third party devices Do not applies to ELC 12DC DA R N amp ELC 12AC R N CPU Only applied to ELC 12DC DA R HMI amp ELC 12AC R HMI CPU if this RS485 module required other extensions would be not available for ELC 12DC DA R HMI amp ELC 12AC R HMI CPU Ethernet module Ethernet module Accessories optional Connection cable between ELC 12 CPU and ELC HMI FP Faceplate for long distance application purpose one and half meters standard length Faceplate ELC HMI s installation unit making it possible for ELC HMI to be externally installed in the front door of cabinet for easy observation and operation while ELC 12 CPU is required to be installed inside User Manual xLogic Micro PLC ELC12 CB A A type connection bridge between ELC 12 CPU amp Extension module Free of charge MMM ELC12 CB B r ELC COVER connection cable between ELC 12 CPU amp Extension module it can be used to remotely connect ELC 12 CPU to its extension units 3 meter standard length CPU S cover with 13 LED indicators indicating IO status if LCD not required Optional Real time da
50. 2010 05 25 10 00 36 0734 18 17 AI002 7 2010 05 25 10 00 36 0734 18 AIO03 6 2010 05 25 10 00 36 0734 20 19 AI0D1 1000 2010 05 25 10 00 37 0234 E 20 AI002 7 2010 05 25 10 00 37 0234 22 21 ATOO3 6 2010 05 25 10 00 37 0234 23 22 ATOOL 1000 2010 05 25 10 00 37 0734 24 23 ATOO2 7 2010 05 25 10 00 37 0734 25 24 ATOO3 6 2010 05 25 10 00 37 0734 26 25 ATOOL 1000 2010 05 25 10 00 38 0234 26 ATOO2 7 2010 05 25 10 00 38 0234 28 27 ATOO3 6 2010 05 25 10 00 38 0234 29 28 ATOOL 1000 2010 05 25 10 00 38 0734 30 29 AI0D2 7 2010 05 25 10 00 38 0734 30 ATOO3 6 2010 05 25 10 00 38 0734 32 31 ATOOL 1000 2010 05 25 10 00 39 0234 33 32 ATOO2 7 2010 05 25 10 00 39 0234 34 33 AI003 6 2010 05 25 10 00 39 0234 34 ATOOL 1000 2010 05 25 10 00 39 0734 36 35 ATOO2 7 2010 05 25 10 00 39 0734 36 AI003 6 2010 05 25 10 00 39 0734 AR xLogie Micro PLC Chapter 7 How to configure the Ethernet modem built in CPU 7 1 Configuration with DeviceManager Notes 1 This chapter is only applied to the CPU with built in LAN port Ethernet PLC Available CPU types ELC 12DC DA R N ELC 22DC DA R N ELC 12AC R N ELC 22AC R N 2 Regarding the operation instruction for Ethernet expansion module you can refer to its specific user manual hence the whole content in this chapter has nothing to do with our Ethernet expansion module ELC Ethernet DC AC ELC12 E Ethernet DC AC Please do not get confused ELC
51. 22DC DA R N figure Ethernet network If the application requires a system where more than one main module is needed and these main modules have to communicate each main module will be connected over an Ethernet Module box to the Ethernet The project down and upload to and from the main modules and the communication between the main modules happens over the Ethernet network Furthermore the visualization of the whole system is possible and easy to realize by a personal computer EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC Mow modus Expansion modules ie ohm el thE Dor ETHERNET Man module a Expansion modules Man modue ae D ce i zz Etr e A Expansion modules Internet Software part Device IP factory setting The default IP address of Ethernet module is 192 168 0 250 Network segment check of PC and Ethernet module s Users need ensure that PC has Ethernet cards and that the network settings of PC and Ethernet module s must keep in the same network segment before establishing communication between PC and Ethernet module The Ethernet module has a factory setting IP 1492 168 0 250 and network mask 255 255 255 0 Users can process as shown in Figure 4 3 to check whether the Ethernet module and PC in the same network segment If in the same network segment then congratulations to you and you do not have to read the following network setting contents If it is different then the followin
52. 5 mm Oto F 59 C ONG to 70 OC IP20 CE 8 digital 2 0 to 10V 12 24V DC 10 8 V 28 8 V DC max 3 V DC 1mA min 8 V DC 1 5 mA 8relay C Q1 Q4 3A Q5 Q8 10A 10 A with resistive load 2 A with inductive load External fuse required 2 Hz with resistive load 0 5 Hz with inductive load 8 digital none 12 24V DC 10 8 V 28 8 V DC max 3 V DC mA min 8 V DC 1 5 mA 8 transistors NPN 0 3 A External fuse required 2 Hz On 35 mm standard mounting rail 4 MW or wall mounting WxHxD 72 x 90 x 58 mm 8 digital 2 0 to 10V 12 24V DC 10 8 V 28 8 V DC max 3 V DC 1mA min 8 V DC 1 5 mA 8 transistors NPN 0 3 A External fuse required 2 Hz xLogie Micro PLC User Manual EZ xLogic Micro PLC Inputs of which can be used in analog mode Input supply voltage Permissible range with signal 0 with signal 1 Input current Outputs Continuous current Short circuit protection Switching frequency Cycle time Integrated time switches power reserve Connection cables Ambient temperature Storage temperature Degree of protection Certification Mounting Dimensions Programming cable 16 digital none 110 240V AC 85 265 V AC UGO Me 2587 Vv DC max 40 V AC 0 03 mA min 79 V AC 0 08 mA 10 relays 10 A with resistive load 2 A with ind
53. 6 transistors NP N 0 3 A External fuse required 10Hz lt 0 1 ms function Yes typ 100 h PC cable RS232 USB Yes 12 digital 8 0 to 10V 12 24V DC 10 8 V 28 8 V DC max 3 V DC 1mA min 8 V DC 1 5 mA 6 transistors NPN 0 3A External fuse required 10Hz lt 0 1 ms function Yes typ 100 h PC cable RS232 or USB Yes EASY xLogie Micro PLC User Manual EZ xLogic Micro PLC SS ooume Inputs of which can be used in analog mode Input supply voltage Permissible range with signal 0 with signal 1 Input current Outputs Continuous current Short circuit protection Switching frequency Connection cables Ambient temperature Storage temperature Degree of protection Certification Mounting Dimensions 8 digital none 110 240V AC 85 5 265 V AC TOO 2F 253 DC max 40 V AC 0 03 mA min 79 V AC 0 08 mA 8relays Q1 Q4 3A Q 5 Q8 10A 10 A with resistive load 2 A with inductive load External fuse required 2 Hz with resistive load 0 5 Hz with inductive load 8 digital none 12 24V DC 10 8 V 28 8 V DC max 3 V DC imA min 8 V DC 1 5 mA 8 relays Q1 Q4 3A Q5 Q8 10A 10 A with resistive load 2 A with inductive load External fuse required 2 Hz with resistive load 0 5 Hz with inductive load 2x1 5 mm or1x 2
54. 6 transistors PNP 0 3A External fuse required 10Hz lt 0 1 ms function Yes typ 10h 12 digital none 12 24V DC 10 8 V 28 8 V DC max 3 V DC imA min 8 V DC 1 5 mA 6 transistors NPN 0 3 A External fuse required 10Hz lt 0 1 ms function Yes typ 10 h 12 digital 8 0 to 10V 12 24V DC 10 8 V 28 8 V DC max 3 V DC imA min 8 V DC 1 5 mA 6 transistors NPN 0 3 A External fuse required lt 0 1 ms function Yes typ 10 h Mi Wi xLogie Micro PLC User Manual EE xLogic Micro PLC a Inputs of which can be used in analog mode Input supply voltage Permissible range with signal 0 with signal 1 Input current Outputs Continuous current Short circuit protection Switching frequency Cycle time Integrated time switches power reserve Connection cables Ambient temperature Storage temperature Degree of protection Certification Mounting Dimensions Programming cable xLogic lt gt xLogic communication RS485 333 12 digital none 110 240V AC 85 265 V AC 100 253 V DC max 40 V AC 0 03 mA min 79 V AC 0 08 mA 6 relays 10 A with resistive load 2 A with inductive load External fuse required 2 Hz with resistive load 0 5 Hz with inductive load lt 0 1 ms function Yes typ 100 h
55. A key three times 8 Move the cursor to the next character press gt key 9 Select 4 press A key four times Now display L M off l2 13 14 15 16 I7 18 19 lA IB IC ID N4115 16 66 66 6 6 6 6 6 6 66 6 6 6 6 6 EASY ELC 260C B4 F POO J Ga a a Fi G2 Q3 4 5 10 Confirm password press OK key xLogie Micro PLC Now the program is protected by the password of 1234 and then you can return to the main menu Note You can cancel a password newly set via ESC key In this instance xLogic will return to main menu and not reserve that password You also can use xLogicsoft to set your password You are not allowed to edit the program protected by password or transfer it to xLogicsoft unless you input a true password previously Modify password In order to modify password you are required to present current password In the menu of the FUNCTION PAGE User Manual xLogic Micro PLC Move the cursor to Password Press A or Y key 2 Confirm Password Press OK key elect Old and input primary password in our instance is 1234 the process is the same as the step 3 to step 10 mentioned above LCD displays L M HW l2 13 14 15 IB I I 13 lA IB IC ID W415 116 6 6 6 6 6 666 6 6 6 6 6 6 86 6 16 EASY ELC 2600 DA4 F Thus you could select New to input new password such as 8888 3 Select 8 press key 4 Move the cur
56. AC 0 03 mA min 79 V AC 0 08 mA 2 relays 10 A with resistive load 2 A with inductive load External fuse required 2 Hz with resistive load 0 5 Hz with inductive load lt 0 1 ms function Yes typ 72 h A digital none 12 24V DC 10 8 V 28 8 V DC max 3 V DC 1mA min 10 V DC 1 5 mA 2 relays 10 A with resistive load 2 A with inductive load External fuse required 2 Hz with resistive load 0 5 Hz with inductive load lt 0 1 ms function Yes typ 72h 2x1 5 mm orl x 2 5 mm LOOTS 16 40 C tora 70 C IP20 CE 4 digital none 12 24V DC 108 V 28 8 V DC max 3 V DC 1mA min 10 V DC 1 5 mA 2 transistors PNP 0 3 A External fuse required 10 Hz lt 0 1 ms function Yes typ 72 h On 35 mm standard mounting rail 4 MW or wall mounting WxHxD 48 90 64 mm PC cable USB No RS232 or No Yes modbus 64 blocks No r Manual PC cable RS232 or USB No No Yes modbus 64 blocks No PC cable RS232 or USB No No Yes modbus 64 blocks No Data logging Extensions High speed input RTC HMI Yes ELC MEMORY No No Yes No Yes ELC MEMORY No No Yes No xLogie Micro PLC No No Yes No Note The following function block cannot be used in ELC 6 series Constant Cursor key Sms input output Sms message input output Basic Boolean function Timer Astronomical clock Stop
57. Configured time interval Time to go Total time expired since the last 1 signal at the Ral input You can edit configured time interval MI Current value of threshold trigger In parameter mode the view of threshold trigger B15 On 0009 On threshold Off 0005 Off threshold fa 0010 Course variable You can alter the threshold value of switching on off 4 3 3 Set password xLogic supply password protection function for your program You can choose according to your need See the following instruction you ll understand the method of setting password Set one password A password contains less than or equal to 4 characters and each character is Arabian number from 0 to 9 It is easy to specify edit or remove the password directly on the xLogic in the Password menu of the function page You should first select the FUNCTION PAGE Read 5 2 1 Move the cursor to Password Press F or Y key 2 Confirm Password Press OK key Example let us set 1234 as password for a program Now the LCD displays the following interface EASY L M oH 12 13 14 15 16 I7 18 19 lA IB IC ID 114 115 116 JCC OC Ct 0 foo WF EASY ELC 2E0C D4 F Select New option and then edit it 3 Select 1 press A key once 4 Move the cursor to the next character press gt key 5 Select 2 press F key twice 6 Move the cursor to the next character press gt key 7 Select 3 press
58. DS NEN Fee A E N N 254 Oha Open Ex ted Docume eeri a A A anna nntantons 256 6 9 2 Edit Function Diagram Progra aAA ENESE 257 Doa 2 Fels FUNE ON BIO E paa AAA E AOE E eer eT 257 9 22 Edit Property of Function Boi Rasinar an OR 257 oe Pome aio ea g E E A O A AE O A A E 258 6 9 2 4 Delete Function Block or Delete LiNKeennaesionanainn n aai 260 eO wel aa cidelpm Eaa ia a merece teem meer tr EE rere ewer mere ver Corer Cre Serene nr rer Tome nent crn mere re ere 260 SM SSS an P cae cee sce ste acca ccc eevee cm pear eee repo ceca tata ma acce to acess nemo a 262 6 12 Modify Password and transfer The Progr ari isstee cree ceteris ucerroersdisswiaaneaineerivineaivaarestintiigyaubariacuduerseaediatle 263 6 13 One line monitoring test circuit PROG AM eesin EAEE Ra 265 Chapter 7 How to configure the Ethernet modem built in CPU eee cscs eeceereeteteeeeseteeteeeenees 270 7 1 COMMGUFAON With DEVIC MaMa GER seiras E 270 7 2 Establish communication between CPU and xLogicSoft SCADA via Ethernet cece 279 7 3 How to establish the communication among CPUS Via Ethernet cece cseneeeeteneeeeseneneeeenenes 282 pyelsie ghee WA 6 6 lers e 0 q cpmenmee terres E Terr arteries ee er eet 292 OS A Gah I hl carcass ea ce ses E A tera eeet mane aaeacaeectetee enone 293 SMO OSC las dl OM O c k eee een arene mnne ne near ene mr meres rene E er eee ny 296 8 21 el AY oS EN EO ecg reise setae E E ero EE 297 SPAR Fag AEE got 6 fe Eaa o
59. E Faritybit Hone Pera Modbus TCE RTU E Data Register Index High Low Conn oz Read Discrete Input lx ad hegister addr D Count 10 on Data addr F Address 11 a me B006 Read the I1 IA status from the slave2 to the F21 F30 of the master Setting as follows BOO06 Nodbus Read Parameter Comment Block name W Show Parameters ave Address 2 Communi cate Params BPS 9600 Stopbits i Databits Paritybit None Tann Type Ethernet Timeu 1 105 FP otocol Modbus CRTU ee Data Register Index High Low Samand 02 Read Discrete Input 1x v Register addr 0 Count 14 hn iane acie F r Address 11 ree _ an EASY User Manual enea P xLogic Micro PLC BOOS Hodbus Read Farameter Comment Black name jf Show Parameters Slave Address 1 Communicate Params BPS 9600 Stopbits 1 Databits E Faritybit Mone Conn Type Ethernet vE inetute F 1 108 Pretaco Modbus TCF RTU gt Tata Register Index High Low A ead Holding Registers 4 2 ommand 03 R fegister addr auto Data addr AF Address 1 gt B010 Read the AF1 value from the slave2 to the AF2 of the master Setting as follows EASY xLogie Micro PLC BO10 Nodbus Read Parameter Comment Block name W Show Parameters ave Address 2 Communicate Params BFS 9600 Stopbits l
60. ELC OQ LI LJ LI E N T TT J J J J 1 3 4 5 7 1 Series name ELC series SSR series 2 Points of input and output 3 Supply power AC or DC 4 Digital Analog D digital DA digital analog L with photoelectricity isolation 5 Output type R relay T transistor TN PNP transistor TP NPN transistor 6 E economic mode 7 N Ethernet port built in Model name expansion module plus with ELC 18 22 26 CPU together to use ELC E OOO O O pE 1 J a 4 qT ps 1 Series name 2 E expansion module 3 Points of input and output 4 Supply power AC or DC 5 Digital Analog D digital DA digital analog 6 Output type R relay TP NPN transistor TN PNP transistor EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC Model name expansion module plus with ELC 12 CPU together to use ELC12 E O O 0 0 do ILITI 1 Series name 2 E expansion module 3 Points of input and output 4 Supply power AC or DC 5 Digital Analog DA digital analog 6 Output type R relay TP NPN transistor TN PNP transistor 2 2 Hardware model selection xLogic Micro PLC Model Selection chart excluding accessories tandard ELC 12 Series CPU Units Model Expansion Brief Description Supply voltage Inputs Outputs High speed count PWM HMI RTC CPU with 4 relays optio ELC 12AC R CAP YES 13 LED indicators AC 110 240V 8 digital NO NO yes 10A nal COVER CPU with 4 digital analog 1I1 14 4 4 relays optio ELC 12DC DA R CAP
61. Miero PLC Error to detect Zero division Overflow or Zero division OR Overflow Auto Reset Reset the output when the failure condition clears Output AQ Q is set high if the error to detect occurred in the last execution of the referenced analog math function block Parameter Referenced FB The value for the Referenced FB parameter references the block number of an already programmed analog math function block Description of the function The analog math error detection block sets the output when the referenced analog math function block has an error You can program the function to set the output on a zero division error an overflow error or when either type of error occurs If you select the automatically reset check box the output is reset prior to the next execution of the function block If not the output retains its state until the analog math error detection block is reset with the R parameter In any scan cycle if the referenced analog math function block executes before the analog math error detection function block the error is detected in the same scan cycle if the referenced analog math function block executes after the analog math error detection function block the error is detected in the next scan cycle Analog math error detection logic table In the table below Error to Detect represents the parameter of the analog math error detection instruction that selects which type of
62. Min and Max refer to the minimum and maximum values specified for the range Special feature Generally the output frequency could be up to 30Hz But the Q3 Q4 of ELC 12 type Q5 Q6 of ELC 18 22 26 PNP transistor output CPU could be up to 333 Hz and the property dialog box of PWM function block setting as follows 5001 H1 Pwa Parameter Comment Block name Sensor 0 10 y Measurement Range Minimum p a Maximum 1000 Parameter Gain Offset P Unit Resolution Specially Out co E z a If the special output is selected the A unit of periodic time will be changed from s 1 100s to s 1 1000s Range Min 0 Periodic time 0 J 0 Seconds s 1 1000s v Decimals in the message text 0 12345 Protection Active cance nar EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC f the special output is selected in the property dialog box of PWM block then the unit of periodic time amp will be changed from s 1 100s to s 1 1000s so if you input 3 1 1000s then its frequency is 1000 3 Hz Notes 1 The periodic time must be no less than 3 ms 2 If the specific output is selected in the property dialog box of PWM block then the output pin of PWM function block cannot be linked as input to other blocks 3 Q3 Q4 in the above dialog box are exactly corresponding to Q3 Q4 of ELC 12 CPU and Q5 Q6 of ELC 22 26 and upgraded ELC 18 CPUs 4 Common
63. ON state In addition the outputs set to ON are selected so that in the event of prolonged operation each output will have been set to ON the same number of times The ON duration of the outputs is set to equal values by applying the following technique As the number of ON inputs increases the outputs changing to ON are those following the order of the PILOT OUTPUT NUMBER 1 for OUTPUT 1 2 for OUTPUT 2 3 for OUTPUT 3 and 4 for OUTPUT 4 For User Manual xLogic Micro PLC ample if the outputs controlled parameter has the value 4 if PILOT OUTPUT NUMBER has the value 43 and just one input is set to ON only the OUTPUT 3 output will be set to ON As soon as two inputs ne hange to ON the OUTPUT 3 output remains at ON and the OUTPUT 4 output changes to ON As soon as a third input changes to ON the OUTPUT 3 and OUTPUT 4 outputs remain ON and OUTPUT 1 changes to ON As soon as the number of outputs decreases the outputs changing to OFF will be those which have been in the ON state the longest As soon as one output changes to OFF PILOT OUTPUT NUMBER takes the value of the output number after the output s which has have just been set to OFF To complete the above example aS soon as one input changes to OFF the OUTPUT 3 output changes to OFF and PILOT OUTPUT NUMBER displays the integer value 4 The Parameters tab in the property box contains the number of outputs which may change to ON depending on the number of inputs w
64. OR block Press OK to select editing mode EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC The cursor no longer appears in the form of an underscore but instead as a flashing solid square xLogic offers you various options here Select GF basic functions by pressing the key until GF appears and confirm with OK xLogic now shows the first block from the list of basic functions The AND is the first block of the basic function list The solid square cursor prompts you to select a block Now press Y or 4 until the OR block appears on the display Press OK to confirm your entries and exit the dialog The display now shows Your complete circuit program layout Block number You have now entered the first block Each new block is automatically assigned a block number The only thing left to do is interconnect the block inputs This is how it is done Press OK The display now shows a User Manu EASY xLogie Micro PLC Select the Co list Press OK The display now shows The first element of the Co list is the Input 1 character namely 1001 Press OK I1 is now connected to the input of the OR block The cursor jumps to the next input of the OR block The display now shows Your complete circuit program in xLogic up to now Now you connect input I2 to the input of the OR block 1 Switch to editing mode Press OK 2 Select the Co list Press or 3 Confirm the Co list with Press OK 4 Selec
65. PWM instruction modulates the analog input value Ax to a pulsed digital output signal The pulse width is proportional to the analog value Ax connection Description EN A positive edge 0 to 1 transition at input En enables the PWM function block Input Ax Analog signal to be modulated to a pulsed digital output signal parameter aa Range of values 10 00 B Zero offset Range of values 10 000 PT Periodic time over which the digital output is modulated p Number of decimals Range of values 0 1 2 3 Output Q Q is set or reset for the proportion of each time period according to the proportion of the standardized value Ax to the analog value range 168 xLogic Micro PLC _seseccesaneeene GRAS 3 Parameter PT he periodic time PT can be provided by the actual value of another already programmed function Analog comparator Ax Ay Analog trigger Ax Analog amplifier Ax Analog multiplexer AQ Analog ramp AQ PI controller AQ Analog math AQ Data latching relay AQ Up Down counter Cnt Parameter p number of decimals Parameter p applies only to the display of the Ax value in a message text Description of the function The function reads the value of the signal at the analog input Ax This value is multiplied by the value of parameter A gain Parameter B offset is added to the product as follows Ax Gain Offset Actual value Ax The fun
66. R AC 110 240V ELC12 E 8DC DA R DC12V DC24V ELC12 E 8DC DA TN DC12V DC24V ELC12 E 8DC DA TP DC12V DC24V ELC12 E PT100 DC12V DC24V ELC12 E AQ V DC15V DC24V ELC12 E AQ I DC12V DC24V ELC12 E Al 1 DC12V DC24V ELC12 E RS485 DC12V DC24V EXM E RS485 DC12V DC24V ELC12 E ETHERNET AC AC 110 240V ELC12 E ETHERNET DC DC12V DC24V ELC HMI ELC COVER CABLE ELC HMI FP CE 2 Channels PT100 resolution Displaying and program making keypad panel for ELC 12 series CPU 4 digital analog 1I1 14 4 DC12V DC24V digital 15 18 4 digital analog I1 14 4 DC12V DC24V digital 15 18 Economic ELC 12 Series CPU Units AC 110 240V DC12V DC24V DC12V DC24V DC12V DC24V 8 digital 4 digital analog I1 14 4 digital 15 18 4 digital analog I1 14 4 digital 15 18 4 digital analog I1 14 4 digital 15 18 Standard ELC 12 Series Expansion Modules 4 Digital 4 Digital analog 4 Digital analog 4 Digital analog 0 1 12bits temperature range 50 C 200 C None None 4 Channels 0 4 20 mA Current Signal xLogie Micro PLC 4 15 16 Max 14kHz I7 2ch Q optio transistors yes 18 Max 60k Hz 3 Q4 nal PNP 4 15 16 Max 14kHz I7 2ch Q optio transistors yes 18 Max 60k Hz 3 Q4 nal NPN 4 relays optio yes 10A nal 4 relays optio yes 10A nal 4 optio transistors yes nal PNP optio transistors yes nal NPN Outputs
67. Tested in accordance with IEC 60068 2 6 IEC 60068 2 27 IEC 60068 2 31 IEC 60068 2 32 EN 55022 EN 55022 EN 61000 3 2 EN 61000 3 3 EN 61000 4 2 Severity 3 EN 61000 4 3 EN 61 000 4 4 EN 51000 4 5 EN 61000 4 6 EN 61000 4 11 lt 0 0ims xLogie Micro PLC 40 C 70 C as age 7 From 10 to 95 no condensation 795 1080 hPa SO2 10 cm m 4 days H2S 1 cm m 4 days Values IP20 5 9 Hz constant amplitude 3 5 mm 9 150 Hz constant acceleration 1 g 18 shocks half sine wave 15g 11 ms Drop height 50 mm 1m Class B Class B 8 kV air discharge 6 kV contact discharge 3V m 1 kV supply and signal lines 0 5kV User Manual xLogic Micro PLC A 2 Technical data xLogic ELC series of which can be used in analog mode Input supply voltage Permissible range with signal 0 with signal 1 Input current Outputs Continuous current Short circuit protection Switching frequency Cycle time Integrated time switches power reserve Connection cables Ambient temperature Storage temperature Degree of protection Certification Mounting Dimensions Programming cable xLogic lt gt xLogic communication RS485 xLogic lt gt network Ethernet Third party device HMI lt gt xLogic Maximum program memory External memory module 4 digital none 110 240V AC 85 265 V AC 100 253 V DC max 40 V
68. Uly n E E ner N re E E E E A A E E A Tt 87 6 2 General Input amp Output TIT ONS sarsie raisti E e a R EE EEE EN 88 Cc Me MS A E E A A E E A A E A E E A nt a neces 88 E O T on a E E TE E A 88 PIELE Lo IS NT E E A E E AA E E A E teeta lone eae pan eatatmaedeaeteaatines 89 6 2 4 Permanent logical levels HI and LO es essssesssessisississisrssrssrsrrstssrrestssrrestssrtestssrrestsrtreststerestrteresrsrteresrrent 89 oe M a S E E E A EEN E A A AE N AA E E A TY 89 OPO ome AREE EE e E ete E A E T ee A ee eee 90 eE e a E E E EE A A en A E A E E A A crn ey ere tee er 90 er ca am cela ie a E E E E E A O E A E arte E 91 CTAR AT o a S a E A A E E O NO AEO N Set oor eres 92 0 o Basic funchons list GP orus E Ra ere eee NEEE er Tr 92 Co LAND e E E A NE AE AE EE 93 5 AND Vitir edge evalua Oeon e T E E A 94 Caa NAND e E A A EAA E EN NEEE A E AEOS 95 Goat NAND with edge svalt atiG isesi E EE 96 eS OR aa E E NEE EE E OEE EEEN O ete ere rT 96 G nO NOR ceia E EE EE E ES 97 iT A O a E E E E E E E earn eee 98 a NO oa E E E E E E E E 99 Goa Boolean PUNCO erenn R E E E OEE NE AER ONEEN ee 99 6 4 Basico on Special TUNCUO NG aneurin aeea E NEEE EERS AE 100 6 4 1 DESIG MATION OF the MPU Senensi A 101 Ca TTE ESO E a O E E E E E 102 oft om Backup of the redl Ume CloCknccsraann a TS 102 GAA Rete nti viy sccis aea E EAEE EE NNA EAE EEEE 102 CASP aE EEr OOE CHO a a OE E E EEE AEN E 103 6 4 6 Calculating the gain and offset of analog valUeS sesssesssssissrsrsse
69. With a disturbance AQ continues to increase decrease until the updated value PV again corresponds to SP The speed with which AQ changes depends on the parameters KC and TI If the input PV exceeds the parameter Max then the updated value PV is set to the value of Max If the PV falls short of the parameter Min then the updated value PV is set to the value of Min If the input R is set to 1 then the AQ output is reset As long as R is set the input A M is disabled Sampling Time The sampling time is fixed at 500 ms Parameter sets In order to simplify the use of the PI controller the parameters for KC TI and Dir are already given as sets for the following applications Parameter Dir Parameter KC Parameter TI 1 0 120 Parameter set Application example Temperature fast Temperature cooling control of small spaces small volumes Temperature slow Heating ventilation temperature cooling control of large spaces large volumes Pressure 1 Quick pressure change compressor control Pressure 2 Slow pressure change differential pressure control flow controller Full level 1 Vat and or reservoir filling without 1 0 1 drain Full level 2 Vat and or reservoir filling withjO 7 20 drain EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC aracteristics when configuring a Sees Observe the Control and regulate basics La ontrol and regulate In engineering quantities can be both controlled and regulated Whe
70. and ELC 6 series CPU have a width of 48mm ELC 18 Series CPU has a width of 95mm ELC E expansion modules have a width of 72mm ELC 22 and ELC 26 Series CPU has a width of 133mm SSR 12 Series CPU has a width of 72mm Note The figure below shows you an example of the installation and removal of an ELC 12 CPU and one expansion module ELC 12 CPU Warning lways switch off power before you remove and insert an expansion module 3 1 DIN rail mounting Mounting How to mount a xLogic module and a expansion module onto a DIN rail 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Hook the xLogic Basic module onto the rail Push down the lower end to snap it on The mounting interlock at the rear must engage Hook the xLogic expansion module onto the rail Slide the module towards the left until it touches the xLogic CPU Push down the lower end to snap it on The mounting interlock at the rear must engage Remove the plastic cover in the expansion port of CPU and expansion module Plus the connection bridge xLogie Micro PLC M All AIZ AIS Als IS I p a E S EASY A N 4 gt O RUN STOP SZ z ELC12 E 8DC DA R ara ER ARANT ELC HMI J DOOOO x Logic ELC 12DC DA R 4 a2 472 _speasspnnspanan Ss DO CG OO OO IOOOC wy J2 17 2 1Ly 2 Wy 2 ily J2 wy J2 ar az a3 ae a3 ae wee ern nener nen NQ ebere Repeat the expansion module steps to mount further expansion module
71. ar Manual EASY xLogie Micro PLC Press OK B2 B001 TL R Fl a Par The B1 block previously connected to Q1 is automatically connected to the uppermost input of the new block Note that you can only interconnect digital inputs with digital outputs or analog inputs with analog outputs The old block will otherwise be lost The off delay block has three inputs At the top is the trigger input Trg you use to start the off delay time In our example the OR block B1 triggers the off delay You reset the time and the output with a signal at the reset input Set the off delay time at parameter T of the input Par In our example we do not use the reset input of the off delay function B2 B001 TL Ba hg Par This is what the display should now show Assigning block parameters Now you set the off delay time T 1 Move the cursor to Par if it not already at this position Press Y or 2 Switch to editing mode Press OK xLogic shows the parameters in the parameter assignment window EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC _ means The parameter is shown B2 R and can be modified in the parameter T The block 00 00 eo parameter B2 is a T 00 00s Fe means Retentivity is enabled for rn this block time function Time value Timebase To change the time value e Press and p to position the cursor e Press and F to modify the value at the relevant position e Confirm you
72. check box when En 0 reset Max Min Description of the function EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC BO01 AN Ear Nin Parameter Eomment ar Blockname Mode a Mode 0 Output Min Mode 1 Output M ax Mode 2 1 S1 0 output Min 1f S1 1 output Max Otherwise Output Ax When enable 0 reset Max Min Schutz aktiv Kemanenz If you select the check box when En 0 reset Max Min En 0 The function sets the AQ value to 0 En 1 The function outputs a value at AQ depending on the settings of Mode and S1 If you do not select the check box when En O reset Max Min En 0 The function holds the value of AQ at the current value En 1 The function outputs a value at AQ depending on the settings of Mode and S1 Mode 0 The function sets AQ to the minimum value Mode 1 The function sets AQ to the maximum value Mode 2 and S1 0 The function sets AQ to the minimum value Mode 2 and S1 1 The function sets AQ to the maximum value Mode 3 or a block value is referenced The function outputs actual analog input value Max Min block upper lower function AIER CORI EKSA FEN Parameter Comment Block name Mode E Mode 0 Output Min Mode 1 Dutput Max Mode 2 1 S1 0 output Min if 5151 output Max Otherwise Output Ax Upper lower limit Upper 32767 pml m In the dialog box of Max Min block there is a
73. communication protocol file for it Description of the function In the configuration of our xLogic communication the xLogic usually serves as a slave via Modbus RTU Protocol and can communicate with a master directly That s to say any device communicating with xLogic sends command to it and then its response will be sent out only when the xLogic has received the command Just as the below figure shows Peripheral uen ies aa HLogic SuperRelay MASTERS SNE RESPONSE message However the Modbus Read or Modbus Write next chapter will introduce it function block would be utilized if xLogic shall be required to play a role of master to communicate with other devices As the following figure shows EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC Quer message Peripheral HLogic SuperRelay SLAVE MASTERS Response message When you put the Modbus read or Modbus Write function block in your program and make some configurations the function that xLogic serves as master will be realized The Property in dialog box of Modbus Read shows as below figure BOO1 Nodbus Read Parameter Comment Block name i 1 Slave Address it Communicate Params BPS 9600 Stopbits Databits Faritybit Comm Type RS232 Time ut Protocol Modbus CRTU Data Register Index High Low M 3 Command jot Read Coils 0x E Register addr 0 Count ft
74. devices via RS485 bus COMOCProgramming R 3 7 port COM1 RS485 1 SMS module R5485 module or Ethernet module COM Reserved one it is for customized for special RS485 module or Ethernet module ELC 12 CPUs LI LC Programming RS232 port Expansion RS485 port O CO OO OO 1 Programming port RS232 port ELC RS232 ELC USB ELC Copier should be inserted in this port Named COMO When the programming port should be used as the standard RS232 port D shape 9 pin header the ELC RS232 cable needed 2 Expansion port RS485 pin definition 2X3 pin female figure 1 2 3 RS485 Al G s6 5 RS485 B EEEE RS485 A2 J RS485 B2 Seng Battery ser Manual EASY oO oO xLogie Miero PLC Communication between CPU and expansion module will use 1 6 pin This named COM2 ome a ELC12 E RS485 module need when ELC 12 CPU communicate with the third party devices via RS485 bus w z and the pin 2 3 should be used by ELC12 E RS485 module This named COM2 The ELC12 E Ethernet module is also using COM3 to connect with CPU Note 1 The baud rates of COMO COM1 COM2 can be modified via the panel key 2 The COM1 port also can work as the common RS485 port when there is no expansion module in the application The standard RS485 module cannot bring out the terminals of COM2 built in ELC 12 series CPU so one customize RS485 module should be used for this case COMO Programming R 237 port COM1 RS485 1 expa
75. j aI Loop error at the time n yenerally applies e SP PV SP The parameter SP is the set value 10 000 to 20 000 assignment w For this parameter you can use the analog output of a different special function PV PV is the process value x and is i calculated as follows PV analog value on input gain offset You can connect the input for example by means of an analog input with a PT100 sensor The gain parameter has an effect on 0 0 to 10 0 PV The offset parameter has an effect on 10 000 to 20 000 PV PV is restricted by the parameters In each case 10 000 to 20 000 Min and Max The Dir parameter gives the action direction of the controller Positive means If set value gt process value then the process value is increased if set value lt process value then the process value is reduced Negative means If set value gt process value then the process value is reduced if set value lt process value then the process value is increased e g heat regulation if the set value is greater than the process value room is too cold the manipulated variable increases the process value User Manual EASY xLogie Micro PLC 6 5 36 Memory write Trg R wy Rem ofTf Short Description Only when there is a low to high trigger at Trg pin the Memory Write block will be activated and the pre configured record action will be performed at the same
76. list Let us assume you want to edit the system cover ABC Select A Press Y Move to the next letter Press b Select B Press Move to the next letter Press Select C Press T Confirm Press OK Om KR W N e Press ESC 5 5 6 Second circuit program Up to this point you have successfully created your first circuit and assigned it a name and if desired a password In this section we will show you how to modify existing circuit programs and how to use the special functions Using this second circuit program we will show you how to e Add a block to an existing circuit program e Select a block for a special function e Assign parameters _ User Manual EASY 79 xLogie Micro PLC Modifying circuits We shall use the first circuit program as a basis for the second with some slight modifications First of all take a look at the circuit diagram for the second circuit program You already know the first part of the circuit 51 and 52 switch a relay which is to be used to switch on the load E1 and to switch off the load with a delay of 12 minutes This is the new block You can see the OR block and the output relay Q1 we have already used in the first circuit program The only difference is the new off delay block Editing the circuit program Switch xLogic to programming mode As a reminder 1 Switch xLogic to programming mode in RUN P
77. name of the output in your circuit program is displayed below this icon status display of output Q1 m Output switched off Status display of output Q1 Ba Output switched on The output status only indicates the status as such Here you cannot switch an output by clicking on an icon When your circuit program switches an output the indicator lamp is active when the output is switched off the indicator lamp is also switched off EASY xLogie Micro PLC Prerequisite The display of signal states and process variables is enabled under Tools ome a Simulation The colored indication lets you identify the 1 or 0 status of a connecting line Default color of connecting lines carrying a 1 signal is red Default color of connecting lines carrying a 0 signal is blue IOUT 100 1003 104 O05 IQUE TOO 100S KJ i WOU WOU LOU g ng 6 9 Basic Operation This chapter will tell you how to write logic function graph Program with xLogicsoft how to simulate the Program you write with xLogicsoft how to communicate between PC and xLogic with xLogicsoft how to copy system document of xLogic with xLogicsoft and how to complete the update of application and system Program code If you want to write a function graph Program first of all it s necessary to start an empty document and then put the function block into editing box First set the property of every function blo
78. onto one of the 4 OUTPUTS on each rising edge of the VALIDATION input A VALUE copied to an output does not revert to 0 when a VALUE is written to another ADDRESS The BASE ADDRESS parameter allows several blocks to be used at the same time to multiply outputs The Parameters tab contains BASE ADDRESS Contains the address of the ADDRESS 1 output SAVE ON POWER BREAK Chooses whether or not the function is reinitialised if the controller power supply is disconnected When they are not connected the ADDRESS and VALUE inputs are set to zero Example When the BASE ADDRESS parameter contains the value 0O these outputs have addresses 0 1 2 3 respectively and in this case if the ADDRESS input equals 2 the VALUE will be copied to the third output If a second block is being used 8 outputs can be demultiplexed by putting the value 4 as the BASE ADDRESS in the second block and connecting the VALIDATION and ADDRESS inputs to the same source EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC Base Address 0 Address o DEM Rem Off BOO1 LAMI Base Address 4 Boo4 ai BOO AM2 REGI F E Vi 234 934 00 Vi 425 i S 425 00 ye Tn ih 6 5 57 Multiplexing Short Description The MUX function carries out two input channel multiplexing on the OUTPUT this is the multiplexer output This value depends upon the state of the SELECTION input If the SELECTION input is inactive the OU
79. output is 0 and the pulses at input Cnt are not counted Output Q is set and reset according to the actual value at Cnt and the set thresholds See the following rules for calculation Calculation rule If the on threshold gt off threshold then Q 1 if Cnt gt On Q 0 if Cnt lt Off If the on threshold lt off threshold then Q 1 if On lt Cnt lt Off Caution The function polls the limit value of the counter once in each cycle Thus if the pulses at the fast inputs are faster than the scan cycle time the SFB might not switch until the so specified limit has been exceeded Example Up to 100 pulses per cycle can be counted 900 pulses have been counted so far On 950 Off 10000 The output is set in the next cycle after the value has reached 1000 The output would not be set at all if the value Off 980 aaa User Manual EASY xLogie Micro PLC 6 5 14 Hours counter F E Fal Par Short description A configured time is triggered with a signal at the monitoring input The output is set when this time has expired Gonmesion mtn A positive edge 0 to 1 transition at input R resets output Q and sets a configured value MI at the counter for the duration of the time to go MN En is the monitoring input xLogic scans the on time of this input Input Ral A positive edge at input Ral Reset all resets both the hours counter OT and the output and sets the configured value MI a
80. properties as needed it s necessary to set up link according to logic control relation and make it an integrated function diagram Operation Method 1 Pitch on shortcut key z When the mouse becomes the shape of a pen it can be used to link EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC To do so move the mouse pointer to a block input or output and press the left mouse button Keep the 284 mouse button being pressed down and then drag the mouse pointer from your selected source terminal o the target terminal Now release the mouse button to anchor the connecting line to both terminals While the connecting line is being drawn it is shown as a straight line between the first terminal and the mouse pointer Once it is anchored it appears as a combination of horizontal and vertical lines which can be manipulated using the selection tool Fig 7 10 4 xLogicsoft offers you a further option of connecting blocks when you right click on the input or output of a block In the shortcut menu click the Connect with block menu command This calls a selection list that contains all blocks available for your connection Click on the relevant target block xLogicsoft Comfort then draws the connecting line This method is especially useful for connecting a source to a target block over a greater distance on the programming interface BOO M2 _ a Invert Connector Connect with Block BOOS M3 EEGA Rem O
81. set shift direction e Shift up S1 accepts the value of input In the previous value of S1 is shifted to S2 S2 is shifted to S3 etc e Shift down S8 accepts the value of input In the previous value of S8 is shifted to S7 S7 is shifted to S6 etc Q outputs the value of the configured shift register bits If retentivity is not enabled the shift function restarts at S1 or S8 after a power failure Note The special function shift register can be used only once in the circuit program 6 5 21 Analog comparator Short description The output is set and reset depending on the difference Ax Ay and on two configurable thresholds EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC Connection Description Inputs Ax Ay Input the analog signals of which you want to determine the delta at the inputs Ax and Ay Use the analog inputs AI1 AI8 the analog outputs AQ1 and AQ2 AI1 AI8 O 10 V corresponds with O 1000 internal value Parameter A Gain Range of values 10 00 B Zero offset Range of values 10 000 On On threshold Range of values 20 000 Off Off threshold Range of values 20 000 p Number of decimals Range of values 0 1 2 3 Q is set or reset depending on the set thresholds Parameter p number of decimals The on threshold On and the off threshold Off can be provided by the actual value of another already programmed function Analog comparator Ax Ay Analog trigger Ax Analog
82. shows the conceptual usage of the inputs not the actual physical markings on the module xLogic s connectors The term connector refers to all connections and states in xLogic The digital I O status can be 0 or 1 Status 0 means that the input does not carry a specific voltage Status 1 means that the input does carry a specific voltage The hi lo connectors have been introduced to make it easier for you to create the circuit program hi high is assigned the status 1 lo low is assigned the status O You do not have to use all of the connectors of a block The circuit program automatically assigns the unused connectors a status that ensures proper functioning of the relevant block For information on the meaning of the term block refer to the topic on Blocks and block numbers EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC a 5 2 Blocks and block numbers This chapter shows you how to use xLogic elements to create complex circuits and how blocks and I O are interconnected In the topic From circuit diagram to xLogic Program you will learn how to transform a conventional circuit into a xLogic circuit program Blocks A block in xLogic represents a function that is used to convert input information into output information Previously you had to wire the individual elements in a control cabinet or terminal box When you create the circuit program you interconnect the blocks To do so simply select the c
83. status at input En is O at least for the duration of the off delay time the output Q is reset to 0 when iy the off delay time has expired The time is reset if the status at input En returns to 1 before the on delay time has expired 6 5 9 Stairway lighting switch Try Far Short description The edge of an input pulse triggers a configurable time The output is reset when this time has expired An off warning can be output prior to the expiration of this time You trigger the time off delay for the stairway switch with a signal at input Trg Trigger Parameter T The output is reset 1 to 0 transition when the time T has expired T Determines the triggering time for the pre warning Ti determines the length of the pre warning time Retentivity set on the status is retentive in memory Output Q Q is reset after the time T has expired A warning signal can be output before this time has expired Parameter The off delay time T the pre warning time T and the pre warning period T L can be provided by the actual value of another already programmed function Analog comparator Ax Ay Analog trigger Ax Analog amplifier Ax Analog multiplexer AQ Analog ramp AQ Analog math AQ PI controller AQ Data latching relay AQ Up Down counter Cnt The value of T can be set modified in parameter mode For information about how to modify refer to chapter 5 2 2 please EASY User Manual xLogi
84. ta FLC Cancel 4 To search PLC s IP by clicking Search button EASY xLogie Micro PLC User Manual xLogic Micro PLC Config Basic Setting Network IP Configuration Server Channels User Config v Channell 1192 168 0 16 Hostlistl BOOTP IP Addre pee 3 Serial Sett DHCP mbnet 255 255 255 0 Connection Password Setting poke ae i i i i i Gateway 192 168 0 1 Communication Configuration x Noels Sextinesibe mean Log Out je Preferred DNS Server Modbus Type C MODBUS TCP v gt PLC Address Mac Address 192 168 0 1 RS232 C R5232 RS232 Port COM ps f z onfig EJ Ethernet PEF c Setting s h Network HetProtocol TCP wv Ethernet Por a ha Server E Channels Worked s Client Active Connect n etn Channa T PLC s IP 192 168 0 16 7 Remote Host 192 168 0 132 Start Character Ox 0 aiti 5 Remote Port 5000 s DNS Query Period 1800 a Local Port 8888 a Flush Input Buffer z With Active Connect Password Setting Kaaeies a Seana cee Connect Response C Client aT VseHostlist On DSR Drop Flush Output Buffer Connect to PLC Cancel Check EOT With Active Connect Hard Disconnect With Passive Connect With Passive Connect At Timeof Disconnect Inactivity Timeout amp 15 2 At Timeof Disconnect xLogicSoft Com port setting dialog box LAN port setting in Device manager Port num
85. the on delay and off delay SFBs By doing so you determine that output Q is only set if the input trigger length Trg output of the analog comparator exceeds the defined on delay time This way you can set a virtual hysteresis which renders the input less sensitive to short changes Particular characteristics to be noted when configuring For help on analog block parameters refer to the Analog value processing section in xLogicsoft Setting the Par parameter The gain and offset parameters are used to adapt the sensors to the relevant application View in programming mode EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC _ Parameter protection mode 4 On threshold 4 Off threshold A 01 00 Gain B 00000 4 Offset p 0 4 Decimals in the message text Example In a heating control system the supply Tv and return line temperatures Tr are to be compared for example with a sensor at AI2 A control signal is to be triggered for example heater On when the difference between the supply and return line temperatures is greater than 15 C The control signal is reset when the difference is less than 5 C The process variable of the temperature is to be shown in parameter assignment mode The thermocouples available have the following technical data 30 to 70 C O to 10 VDC 0 C 300 Offset 30 Range of values 1000 30 to 70 C 100 gt Gain 100 1000 0 1 On threshold
86. transport storage positioning and assembly as well as careful operation and maintenance Trademarks All names identified by xLogic are registered trademarks of the EASY The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner Copyright Easy 2007all rights reserved The distribution and duplication of this document or the utilization and transmission of its contents are not permitted without express written permission Offenders will be liable for damages All rights including rights created by patent grant or registration of a utility model or design are reserved Disclaim of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described Since variance cannot be precluded entirely we cannot guarantee full consistency However the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions Additional support We take pride in answering your question as soon as we can Please consult our website at www xLogic plc com for your closest point of contact or email us at Sales xlogic relay com EASY xLogie Micro PLC Contents CORO E E E AEE EE A A E T E EEE E EE EE 6 Chapter 1 General Introduction to XLOG Cesta tesco ee rete cen ees EATE 11 ETOYS IEN e E E E E E N TA E E E E gears 11 La Pon IONE dares a0 E
87. v On 2008 03 15 adp r d Q Off 2010 Mar Mar Mar 15 15 B6 2 B6 3 ON OFF YYYY MM DD YYYY MM DD 2008 03 15 2010 Example 5 Yearly mode off Monthly mode off Pulse off On Time 2008 06 01 Off Time 2008 08 31 On June 1 2008 the timer output switches on and remains on until August 31 2010 EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC YYYY MM DD On 2008 06 01 Off 2010 08 31 ON s YYYY MM DD YYYY MM DD 2008 06 01 2010 08 31 Example 6 Yearly mode off Monthly mode off Pulse selected On Time 2008 03 15 Off Time KK AKA KK On March 15 2008 the timer output switches on for one cycle Because the timer does not have a monthly action or yearly action the timer output pulses only one time at the specified On Time 2008 2009 2010 2011 YYYY MM DD n n n a On 2008 03 15 O fi k kK EE tk ON YYYY MM DD YYYY MM DD 2008 03 15 kkkk kk ek Example 7 Yearly mode on Monthly mode off Pulse off On Time 2008 12 15 Off Time 2010 01 07 On December 15 of 2008 and 2009 the timer output switches on and remains on until January 7 of the following year When the timer output turns off on January 7 2010 it does NOT turn on again the following December 15 YYYY MM DD On 2008 12 15 Off 2010 01 07 ON Monthly YYYY MM DD YYYY MM DD Pulse Off 2008 12 15 2010 01 07 Example 8 Yearly mode on Monthly mode on On Time 2008 01 Off Tim
88. wt Yearly Protection Active Pulse Output Sample configuration The output of an xLogic is to be set annually on March 1 reset on April 4 set again on July 7 and reset again on November 19 You need to configure two yearly timers with corresponding on times Then logically link the outputs by means of an OR block EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC Yearly Timer 1 Yearly Timer 2 On time Mar 1 On time Jul 7 Off time Apr 4 Off time Nov 19 YYYY MM DD 2099 11 19 YYYY MM DD 2099 04 04 Result l l l l March 1 i July 7 l l i l at 00 00 h at 00 00 h Aprl 4 November 19 at 00 00 h at 00 00 h Place two yearly timer switch SFBs on your programming interface and configure the blocks as specified Create a logical link of the blocks via a standard OR block The OR output is 1 if at least one of the yearly ser Manual _ 131 On Time Month Day p E cale C E On Year Fe l On Time Month Day zz cale On Year 2000 OEE Time Month Day E cale m Off Year Pr OEE Time Month Day i 1 f Off Year 2099 2 EASY xLogie Micro PLC timer switches is set ee 6 5 13 Up Down counter Short description An input pulse increments or decrements an internal value depending on the parameter setting The output is set or reset when a configured threshold is reached The direction of count can be changed
89. 0 8 J 0 U 1 l 7 j 0 0 0 0 0 J 0 0 0 0 0 j 0 0 0 0 0 0 fu 1 i Il i fi il i i Oulpul configuralion foreach cam position Number of seachad sles Position of the cam Notes 1 The FORWARD input takes priority over the BACKWARD input 2 If the FORWARD and REVERSE inputs are not connected they are set to inactive When selected the Retentivity enables the current value of the timer to be retrieved following a power failure Modification of Parameters from the Front Panel To modify the parameters from the front panel of the controller do not tick up the Protection Active box of the property dialog box From the PARAMETERS menu it is possible to modify bit wise the contents of all the cam programmer steps but it is not possible to modify the number of steps After you have selected the block number then enter The step number Value between 0 49 Output status 1 8 For each output one can set the value to INACTIVE or ACTIVE 6 5 48 Angular Cam Timer Short description This function block is used to describe operation of a cam timer based on the angle made by the cams 225 E User Manual EASY EASY oO oO xLogie Miero PLC as the analog input The number of steps can be selected and each step corresponds 2 iy configurable outputs ay conmesion pesson OOOO O Enables the function If this input is not activated the function remains inactive Activated implicitly if it has not be
90. 1 Only one function key is allowed to be pressed down at any one time if you press down two or more at the same time xLogic does not process 2 If the arrow keys UP DOWN LEFT and RIGHT Esc and OK had been applied to the program then they would be invalid for menu operation e g manual programming parameters modification and view alarming message etc 6 2 6 Shift register bits She xLogic provides the shift register bits S1 to S8 which are assigned the read only attribute in the circuit program The content of shift register bits can only be modified by means of the Shift register special function 6 2 7 Analog inputs You can use up to 36 analog inputs In your block configuration you can assign a new input terminal to an input block provided this terminal is not already used in the circuit program EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC Property x Par ameter Simul ation Comment Main Ext Module Input Conduct of analog output in SIUF mode coset tan oi For help on analog block parameter refer to Information on analog value processing 6 2 8 F digital flag Flags are used when xLogic works in a communication system F is digital flag which is used to save transfer signal 1 or O data format is Bit and AF is analog flag which is used to save transfer analog values data format is Signed short between the master and slave devices Both of the flags digital ana
91. 1 Q1 Q11 1 11 1LOU001T 000000000004 2011 01 30 13 54 37 O1 Q11 1 111 O000 1000000000004 2011 01 30 13 52 43 O1 Q11 1 1110000 1000000000004 2011 01 30 13 52 49 O1 Q11 1 111 O000 1000000000004 2011 01 30 13 54 55 Q1 Q11 1 111 OU001 000000000004 2011 01 30 13 53 01 Q1 Q11 1 11 1O0001 000000000004 Per program every 6 seconds the record will do once and the Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q11 will be all ON You can see the record file and you ll see the recording time and the status of the output Q1 QU1 1TLIO00 100000000000 Qgi g4 Q11 Notes 1 The ELC MEMORY only can be inserted into the RS232 port programming port of ELC series CPU 2 If this function block is working the RS232 port programming port will be occupied some data will be being transferred if you want to use the programming port for some purposes for example download or upload program you must make sure the Trg pin of this block keeps at Low status or stop the CPU by panel key 6 5 37 Memory Read T F q Ts oT Rem aoff 5 Short Description Only when there is a low to high trigger at Trg pin the Memory Read block will be activated once and xLogic CPU will read correlative data bit or short to set pre configured register from the file in the SD card of ELC MEMORY module at the same time the output will switch on if the read action had been done successfully EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC fronnection Description o ey Trg input Only whe
92. 8 mA 8 relays 8 relays 8 relays 8 transistors PNP 10 A with 10 A with 10 A with 0 3 A resistive load resistive resistive load 2 A with load 2 A with inductive load 2 A with inductive load inductive load External fuse External fuse External fuse External fuse required required required required 2 Hz with 2 Hz with 2 Hz with 10Hz resistive load resistive resistive load 0 5 Hz with load 0 5 Hz with inductive load 0 5 Hz with inductive load inductive load lt 0 1 lt 0 1 lt 0 1 lt 0 1 ms function ms function ms function ms function Yes typ 100h Yes typ Yes typ 100 h Yes typ 100 h 100h 2x 1 5mm or 1x2 5 mm 20 to 55 C 40 C to 70 C IP20 CE On 35 mm standard mounting rail 4 MW or wall mounting W X H X D 133 x 90 x 58 mm PC cable PC cable PC cable RS232 PC cable RS232 RS232 or RS232 or or USB or USB USB USB Yes Yes Yes Yes ser Manual 14 digital 8 0 to 10V 12 24V DC 10 8 V 28 8 V DC max 3 V DC 1mA min 8 V DC 1 5 mA 8 transistors PNP 0 3A External fuse required 10Hz lt 0 1 ms function Yes typ 100 h PC cable RS232 or USB Yes a 14 digital none 12 24V DC 10 8 V 28 8 V DC max 3 V DC 1mA min 8 V DC 1 5 mA 8 transistors NPN 0 3 A External fuse required 10Hz lt 0 1 ms function Yes typ 100 h PC cable RS232 or USB Yes 14 digital 8 0 to 10V
93. E A rn rere terse tere meow nner rs A T eee O ee eT 298 SMG RAV lalel cy dre qipen Ac a emer erent ream E a renee erent ere E E ener ee te eer ner 299 el Standard Solutio gcc c aces eens a E EEEN RAEE 300 gaa TNE SC hENME OF KLOC areeiro cee reeree mere se tetera ee ee ee ae ee ee eee 301 xLogie Micro PLC Sr eles O 0010 e a E E A S E EE E E ee eee 303 eee Seat LN SUL O aa A E A T cca eee a 303 Se TE S 8 Als dal oe Olas lt We 10 Cee eet E eee ene eee ee ee 304 oS Dayne AMD y A oA Meee mere rere cnn enter nee ne eee mee eee ens ee 306 Cone Staal Gl SO IL El Ol ge ciseecteneesececesceace tes E E oan E E EENE 306 ooe TES NENE 6 ae Me 8 comeneneeter ne rs E Se tet Nera ree mentee ee cent erent eo eee eee 307 CORINE O10 11 ar a E E eee 308 86 1 Standard sol liON esrar E AE EE EEE 309 Paa TE Ee 0 OE a A A EAT N E ee 310 Chapter 9 Modbus function code and Register addresSsSeS e ssesseesreseressrisrsrrrsrersrrtsrsrrstrsrststsrnrsrternrersrsrerset 311 DR eC A 55s Ol L O ea a E E E AS EEO EAN E 312 PRD SVG onrnionain a EEE a A a NE oietonataee 319 AT eou ae daa E E T S 319 A 3 Switching capacity and service life of the relay OuUtputs es sesessssesesssrsresssseresrssesessessstssenenrerenrnrenenrsrenene 344 EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC Chapter 1 General Introduction to xLogic 1 1 Overview xLogic is a universal logic module made by Easy xLogic a compact expandable CPU that can r
94. E R E A E E E A EE 11 Chapter 2 Hardware models and reSoUrCE Seserepan a tarauilisvtvesdebeostinatonsaiacebueatenatinencttes 16 2 L Namina Rules of ELCOSSR SENGS srren aE E N 16 PROM a rol dWw are model Sele CHO erecire een meen A E E E EE 17 2 3 EC i Be FN SSI isss EE EEN 23 Chapter 3 Instaling removind XLOglCrersssiisiiiis oa AAE a a ene SEE 27 L DIN TAE N a E E E A E E EE EE N A 27 N T a E ENE T cco E AE O OINO O E OAE 29 3 3 MOUNTING EL GH MIF EP sen a a E N 32 Se SIG LE lee 4 lee a eceemreennemrres mene tetera rermertrt E re er ere ee eee eee ee ee ee 34 3 Al CONNECUNG the DOWER SUPPI Yarina E E A E 34 Dr 2 CONNECUNI KOC C MPU ereus S A baaagtiene yeas 35 SAS CONMECUMG XLOGIG QUEDUUS asese EEEE EAE EEES ATA 38 3 4 4 Communication p rt instructions i essssnesreisinietenrerieietiriin as Nne ainnir aiea 4i Chapter4 Parameters modification HMI operatio l sessissciisesstssissscscasaeacanscaseienvas caun tanacnetenecunserssuieetucaucieativennmunniaiog 44 Ait OVERVIEW OF XEO MEM veseseiwnscpcotabceroansnicnsyagarstaety N NAE EENEN E 44 CES R aein Ene gi asa lores E A E E A A E E E A 45 A E NO gig C aaa E T AEA 48 Aid HOW tO SWITCH RUN SOD ceisiai eison anaE EEEE EEEE A E T 49 AWC MMS Se E E E E E E E E eae A er ert es 50 nepe Ee oe e e ME E A E E E arenes 53 4 3 4 How to set address of CPU and expansion module ssesessesesssissesesisresisrsrssrsresesssresrssesesessenesensenrsrenee 56 43 5 Ser LCD Dackliight and MOS plums to
95. E Time Month Day ef Minute Second Hour jio 53 43 Use System Time 2 Fig 7 10 12 Modify Time Interface d Display system time in this dialog box click 5t cue shown as Fig 7 10 13 appears to renew time of xLogic succeed OK Setting Succeed Ss Fig 7 10 13 Setup Time Succeed 2 Download Upload Function Block Program After you debug the function graph successfully you need to download it into xLogic and operate as following process Operation Method of read in Program a First of all link xLogic with your PC through the optional way RS232 cable USB cable need install driver first Ethernet connection b Open application software xLogicsoft set up a new document then open computer com Click option fed Configuration under menu Tools with left button of the mouse or click E in toolbar EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC 4c Click option transfer gt PC gt xLogic under menu Tools or click button j in toolbar d Click button H with left button of mouse start update Program downloading status shown as Fig 7 10 14 display update Program course as 19 Fig 7 10 14 downloading status Attn After the Program update xLogic will run the Program automatically need not restart Operation Method of Upload Program a Click option Transfer gt xLogic gt PC under menu Tools with left button of mouse or click
96. ELC 6 Series CPU EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC ORUN STOP ELC 12 E 8DC DA R OUTPUT 20t D PaA OUTPUT 203s A Raby 0A 1 Power supply 2 Input 3 extension port left 4 expansion port Right Program port for applied to ELC 6 CPU 6 ELC 22 and ELC 26 series CPU DA AF F a a ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee 1 Power supply 2 Input 3 Program RS232 port 4 HMI LCD panel 5 keypad 6 Extension RS485 port 7 Output 7 ELC 22DC DA R N ELC 22AC R N E ASY xLogie Micro PLC o A WAISAINISININSISNINAINIEINAIN EIN AN E ANAN 90 0 1 Power supply 2 Input 3 Program RS232 port 4 HMI LCD panel 5 keypad 6 Extension RS485 port 7 Output 8 LAN port 8 SSR 12 series with LCD model OO OO OO OO 1 Power supply amp Input terminals 2 Program Port can be used as RS232 port with ELC RS232 or RS485 port with PRO RS485 3 HMI LCD panel 4 keypad 5 Output terminals 9 SSR 12 series without LCD model OO OO OO OO 1 Power supply amp Input terminals 2 Program Port can be used as RS232 port with ELC RS232 or RS485 port with PRO RS485 3 RUN STOP Indicator 4 Output terminals EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC Chapter 3 Installing removing xLogic Dimensions The xLogic installation dimensions are compliant with DIN 43880 xLogic can be snap mounted to 35 mm DIN rails to EN 50022 or on the wall xLogic width ELC 12 Series CPU has a width of 72mm ELC12 E expansion module
97. I ELC 12DC DA TN CAP ELC 12DC DA TN ELC COVER ELC 12DC DA TP HMI ELC 12DC DA TP ELC HMI Eke 12D DA IP CAP ELG 12DC DA TP TEL COVER xLogie Micro PLC Inputs of which can be used in analog mode Input supply voltage Permissible range with signal 0 with signal 1 Input current Outputs Continuous current Short circuit protection Switching frequency Cycle time Integrated time switches power reserve Connection cables Ambient temperature Storage temperature Degree of protection Certification Mounting Dimensions Programming cable xLogic lt gt xLogic communication RS485 ASY 8 digital none 110 240V AC 85 265 VAC 100 253 VDC max 40 V AC 0 03 mA 7S i AC 0 08 mA min 4 relays 10 A with resistive load 2 A with inductive load External fuse required 2 Hz with resistive load 0 5 Hz with inductive load lt 0 1 ms function Yes typ 72h 8 digital none 12 24V DC 10 8 V 28 8 V DC max 3 V DC 1mA min 10 V DC 1 5 mA 4 relays 10 A with resistive load 2 A with inductive load External fuse required 2 Hz with resistive load Ors Hz with inductive load lt 0 1 ms function Yes typ 72 h 2x1 5 mm or ix 2 5 mm VA9 fe ao 5S5 SC 740 9C to F 709C IP20 CE 8 digital none 12 24V DC 10 8 V 28 8 V DC max 3 V DC 1mA min 10 V DC 1 5 mA 4 transistors PNP 0 3 A External fu
98. L 2 Aa OG SION Trga eea ta etientaeaciertetenomegmeleiantemiesadls 158 ohio AG we aiol oie aa E gener meen te rene Ter eer en N Terre ener tre acre rrr rrr et tr 160 655 25 ANalOG differential toge ena E T E NT 163 CEO ANIOI MUUDE a A A AE A T A E O OEE ARES 165 iF SS COS a T AEA E E E E E 167 6 5 28 Pulse Width Modulator PWM sessen a E E A 168 enee e aE e E cer E E E re E A E A E A E a ere 171 CEAC ANO M ie R OAA AAA E O E OOT O EO ENAS 173 SPor DE ge OaE E E ee ee ee 173 6 9191 Analog mati error dc tec Teana R N 175 Oi Modbus FR a Sh cose sease E A E ee ee eee 177 amo me Ca MdB IEE een etn eer E E eee eee ee ee ee ere 183 creo FD T a tig OM aslo Gemeente ter oe ener een eter ee errr atte ee cee re 187 amo me og Ui ONONE genet een tnt ene een ene teen ne nn ee ee 189 ont Som METO N gh Terence mee E A E Crem en E A T rere ee 200 i MEMO Rah este tte cate ce tags return eee reget cerca lorena A AN E EEEE OON 204 EM a aa Ea gt E enn teres E nent N E cere en E Sener ene N ener A E Te 207 S BIE TO Wor eaa E E E E E E EE E A 209 EO SEO Ct cet EE A A E E E NEE E E E es EE E EE 210 OSALAN HO I MI EF EEEE E EE O AO AAEE OA 212 CBA EMDI Mea E T EN AE 213 VS A VI E T E E N A E E A N E E aeuietanites 216 eron ORBE e Fe E E EE E A acca E E A T ee E 217 CaS ON Ol U a E EE O E E A OON E E E E 219 CSAC AONO Meal COOK aa EN E ee ee 222 amon FO lige ONO e O TET A E OO ce EA E E 224 GALANDU E Cam LINE Peria a A R 225 0519 PUMPS Manage MeNi ensenis A senet
99. LC 6 CPU O 1 BIT R W ELC 18 CPU ELC E 16 EXT1 ELC E 16 EXT2 ELC E 16 EXT3 Function code 01 05 15 EXM 12 ELC 12 CPU ELC12 E 8 EXT1 ELC12 E 8 EXT2 ELC12 E 8 EXT3 ELC 22 26 CPU ELC E 16 EXT1 ELC E 16 EXT2 ELC E 16 EXT3 SMS Output 512 515 SMS Message Output 516 525 EASY Middle coil Ox M coil can show function block status BOL M1 BOO Mz Rem of F outputs F1 EASY xLogie Micro PLC ELC 6 amp EconomicELC BIT R neal 12 Series 256 319 Function code 01 Standard EXM 12 ELC 12 Series 256 767 Standard economic Series Upgraded Series 256 767 ELC 22 26 256 767 ELC 6 amp Economic ELC 12 Series 1536 1567 R W Function code EXM 12 Standard 01 05 15 ELC 12 1536 1599 ELC 18 Series 768 799 Upgraded ELC 18 Series 1536 1599 ELC 22 26 1536 1599 User Manual xLogic Micro PLC fig register timer ELC 6 amp Economic ter value ELC 12 Series 0 63 register 0 EXM 12 ELC 12 Series Rem Off kem 00 00s On 0 off 0 ELC 18 Series O 255 Upgraded ELC 18 Series O 511 ELC 22 26 O 511 EASY xLogie Micro PLC Analog quantity input EXM 12 Signed short register ELC 12 Series 1024 1279 ATOO CPU 1024 1031 EXT1 1032 1039 EXT2 1040 ELC 18 Series 256 511 CPU 256 263 EXT1 264 271 EXT2 272 Upgraded ELC 18 Series CPU 1024 1031 EXT1 1032
100. LO i Blocks ar ag F i AF CM i AM Block l 1 iat B002 M2 On Delay A A BOOS M3 Analog thresh TE EASY E User Manual xLogic Micro PLC Analog input value of ELC 12 CPU and extensions ATOO 1 Priority f Acknowledge Message f I0 Blocks i AT C CF AF OM AM Insert Block Parameter AIO12 A1013 Ext 02 A1014 Ext 03 E Ext 04 Ext 05 D Analog output value of CPU and extensions AQOOL et Far ameter Comment Message Text amp Cc Block name Priority f 7 Acknowledge Message I0 Blocks ar tf Ag er i AF cm c an Block Far ameter AQ012 E F digital flag status Fi EASY xLogie Micro PLC Plock nena Message Text Decimals Priority f 1 Acknowledge Message C If0 Blocks l es G 0 F C AF cm CAM Block q Parameter rr F1 F64 is Here is start number of F Count 5 Here is the counting of F Max T Such configuration is to display the status of F15 F20 time Current date Hessage enable time Hessage enable date F AF analog flag value AF 1 E el td tl e Parameter Conment Message Text amp oc Block name Priority f Acknowledge Message f Lo f Blocks ar O Ag r fe AF Parameter time date enable time enable date G
101. M status M status in fact it can be used to show the status of the function blocks Hi or Low 5001 M1 B002 M2 B003 M3 REGO REG1 REG2 Rem Off Rem Offt MI 0 00 00s On 0 OT 0h Off 0 Q gt 0 RtEn Start 0 EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC H AM value AM value it can be used to display the current value of analog blocks which has analog output pin BOO1 AM1 BOO ANZ BOO3 AM3 REGO REGI REG2 Gain 1 00 1 O 1 O Offset 0 y2 0 REG Point 0 3 0 y2 0 4 0 REG2 Point 0 3 0 REG2 4 0 Point 0 14 2 4 Y3 4 ULE essage texts Parameter Comment Block name f Acknowledge Message Message Text ec BREE Decimals Priority I O Blocks Ar C ag CF C AF Cm an ddl Parameter Start l a ount time date enable time enable date Updated function from October 2014 With text message the text can display big number 6 bits or 4 bits ELC 22 26 Series CPU and SSR 12 CPU B003 E3 Hessage texts This feature only can be used in Parameter Comment Block name f2 Acknowledge Message V Show Parameters Priority Number size Medium number 6 bits 7 Small number Medium number 6 bits Large number 4 bits CA C ag Ji so Double click P ELC 260C D4 A ouble click Parameter YBOC D4 F Character Message Text amp c
102. Micro PLC L M 1 12 13 14 15 I6 I 18 19 lA IB IC ID H415 16 I E E E O E O O O a O E a a E E EASY F3 F4 Zt oo 4 ELC 26DC DAR a ow ne ER Lfd Lfd eee Lfd d ee ee ee es Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 05 Q6 Q Q8 PE 010 Change with Up and Down key And confirm with OK There are 4 options available RTU ASCII TCP RTU TCP ASCII Note If you want to use the Modbus TCP protocol generally you can select the TCP RTU 4 3 7 Modification of System Time You should first select the FUNCTION PAGE read 4 2 1 Move the cursor to Clock Press A or Y key 2 Confirm Clock Press OK key L M WW l2 13 l4 15 I6 I 18 19 JA IB IC ID 114115 16 A E E E E O O O O o O a O a E E EASY ELC 26DC DA R eeee 0020200000060000008680 Lfd Lfd a L ee a ee a ee ee ee ee Q1 Q2 03 O4 O05 6 O07 8 D3 10 L M WW l2 13 I4 15 16 VF 18 19 lA IB IC ID 14115 116 J E E E E O O O O a a O eee EASY 43 ELC 26DC DA R Gs ok Seeeageeeeeeaesee eenenegce ee ee eee eee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee Q1 Q2 Q3 g4 05 Q6 07 Q8 PE 010 Press A or kd key to realize the date which you want to set After you finished your setting press OK key to return to ser Manu xLogie Micro PLC L M 1 12 13 14 15 I6 I 18 19 JA IB IC ID 114115 116 eeeeeeeoeeoeeee0ee0e086080 EASY cy ELC 26DC DA R es wa eee0e0000000000000680 e ee ee ee ee a ee ee a ee ee ee Q1 02 03 Q4 05 06 07
103. PLC Enable triggers the on delay for the random generator The negative edge 1 to 0 transition triggers the off dela for the random generator Parameter TH The on delay is determined at random and lie between 0 s and Tu TL The off delay is determined at random and lie between 0 s and T Q is set on expiration of the on delay if En is still set It is reset when the off delay time has expired and if En has not been set again Parameter The on delay time TH and the off delay time TL can be provided by the actual value of another already programmed function Analog comparator Ax Ay Analog trigger Ax Analog amplifier Ax Analog multiplexer AQ Analog ramp AQ Analog math AQ PI controller AQ Data latching relay AQ Up Down counter Cnt The value of TH TL can be set modified in parameter mode For information about how to modify refer to chapter 5 2 2 please Timing diagram TH TL Description of the function With the O to 1 transition at input En a random time on delay time between 0 s and Tu is set and triggered If the status at input En is 1 at least for the duration of the on delay the output is set to 1 when this on delay time has expired The time is reset if the status at input En is reset to 0 before the on delay time has expired When input En is reset 0 a random time off delay time between 0 s and T is set and triggered mae User Manual EASY xLogie Micro PLC If the
104. TPUT corresponds to CHANNEL A active the OUTPUT corresponds to CHANNEL B Notes 1 If the SELECTION input is not connected then it is considered to be inactive 2 If CHANNELS A or B are not connected then they are set to 0 ar Manual EASY xLogie Micro PLC 6 5 58 Multiplexer Short Description This function multiplexes the WORD inputs It is used to route the value of one of the inputs selected by the ADDRESS input to the output The input is routed to the output on each rising edge of the VALIDATION input The BASE ADDRESS parameter allows several blocks to be used at the same time to multiply inputs The Parameters tab contains BASE ADDRESS Contains the address of the INPUT 1 input SAVE ON POWER BREAK Chooses whether or not the function is reinitialized if the controller power supply is disconnected When they are not connected the digital input is in the OFF state and the WORD inputs contain 0 Example When the BASE ADDRESS parameter contains the value O these inputs have addresses O0 1 2 3 respectively and in this case if the ADDRESS input equals 2 the VALUE of the third input will be copied to the output If a second block is being used 8 inputs can be demultiplexed by putting the value 4 as the BASE ADDRESS in the second block and connecting the VALIDATION and ADDRESS inputs to the same source Base Address 0 Base Address 0 I001 BOOS ANS a BOOS AMS
105. U Basic Setting Network ae ChangePassword Channell Hostlistl Ween ane Serial Sett Conmectionl Password Setting ld Password Hew Password as EASY xLogie Micro PLC Password setting Password can be changed in such dialog box Password is required for accessing the Ethernet port You must enter at least one character or number x onfiz Basie Setting Hetwork on SRE YORE Channels Password Setting S Apply Settings Re O Load defaults Power manage O Load defaults and reboot O Reboot Save and reboot Success Apply Settings Reset Merely Save and reboot option can be selected among those options shown in above page Export you settings Make Exportable Click to export the settings oa Dagicalanarac 2 00 HE export DAR Source 0 OF o Basic Setting This Page All Channels User Selected 4 Network V Server E 4 Channels Ie 4 Password Settin Excluded Options M Apply Settings 3 Ip Address Mac Address Local Time _ TCP Local Port V Log Out Time Zone Operate Tools Language Device Hame This Device Local Time Eal Destination Time Server i File C Documents and Settings chennai fa RE t O Selected Devices Web Console User Name Password The configuration would be saved as a xml file EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC You also
106. YES 13 LED indicators DC12V DC24V 15 16 Max 14kHz I7 yes digital 15 18 10A nal COVER 18 Max 60k Hz CPU with 4 digital analog I1 14 4 15 16 Max 14kHz I7 optio ELC 12DC DA TN CAP YES 13 LED indicators DC12V DC24V transistors yes digital 15 18 18 Max 60k Hz nal COVER PNP CPU with 4 digital analog I1 14 4 15 16 Max 14kHz I7 optio ELC 12DC DA TP CAP YES 13 LED indicators DC12V DC24V transistors yes digital 15 18 18 Max 60k Hz nal COVER NPN CPU with keypad 4 optio ELC 12AC R HMI YES AC 110 240V 8 digital yes panel LCD relays 10A nal YES yes ELC 12AC R N HMI CPU with keypad 4 relays AC 110 240V 8 digital built in Ethernet port panel LCD 10A CPU with keypad 4 digital analog I1 14 4 4 relays optio ELC 12DC DA R HMI DC12V DC24V 15 16 Max 14kHz I7 yes panel LCD digital 15 18 10A nal 18 Max 60k Hz ELC 12DC DA R N HMI CPU with keypad 4 digital analog I1 14 4 4 relays 15 16 Max 14kHz I7 DC12V DC24V YES yes built in Ethernet port panel LCD digital 15 18 10A 18 Max 60k Hz iL CS CPU with keypad ELC 12DC DA TN HMI YES panel LCD CPU with keypad ELC 12DC DA TP HMI YES panel LCD CPU with ELC 12AC R E CAP 13 LED indicators COVER CPU with ELC 12DC D R E CAP 13 LED indicators COVER CPU with ELC 12DC D TN E CAP 13 LED indicators Discontinued COVER CPU with ELC 12DC D TP CAP 13 LED indicators Discontinued COVER Supply voltage ELC12 E 8AC
107. a oa D ho iad an D j Ww EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC Parallel circuit with multiple break contacts in the circuit diagram F i ba Symbol in xLogic The output of an NAND function is only O if all inputs are 1 i e when they are closed A block input that is not used x is assigned x 1 Logic table of the NAND block EASY xLogie Micro PLC 6 3 4 NAND with edge evaluation Fobra The output of a NAND with edge evaluation is only 1 at least one input is O and all inputs were 1 during the last cycle The output is set to 1 for the duration of one cycle and must be reset to O at least for the duration of the next cycle before it can be set to 1 again A block input that is not used x is assigned x 1 Timing diagram of a NAND with edge evaluation 6 3 5 OR Circuit diagram of a parallel circuit with several make contacts i Symbol in xLogic F Ih The output of an OR is 1 if at least one input is 1 closed a A block input that is not used x is assigned x 0 EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC logic table of the OR function 6 3 6 NOR Circuit diagram of a series circuit with several break contacts l l h l inin F 0i hi Symbol in xLogic The output of a NOR NOT OR is only 1 if all inputs are O i e when they are open When one of the inputs is switched on logical 1 state the output is switched of
108. able temperature drop from opening the window The person is therefore the controller EASY xLogie Micro PLC command variable isturbance variable process Value controller Sensor manipulated variable The control device is formed from the actuator and the control The control and controller together form the regulating device The following picture gives an abstract portrayal of the situation described above The comparing element uses the sensor to compare the command variable with the process value If the command variables and process value deviate from one another this results in a positive or negative loop error that in turn changes the process value disturbance vanable command variable aa oP controlling actuator contral value PV element process Ay comparing loop emor E manipulated vanable cht element e i3P PY SENnSoOr Control loop The process value x influences the manipulated variable M by means of the regulating device This creates a closed circuit that is also known as a control loop If in the example above the window is opened the temperature in the room drops The person must increase the heat output of the heater If the heat output is increased too much it will get too hot The person must then reduce the heat output If the heat output is increased or reduced too quickly then the control loop starts to sway The room temperature fluctuates It is eit
109. ak To Tee m 1 n 2 r In Manipulated variable of the I controller at the time n M pet Manipulated variable of the I controller at the time n 1 also called integral sum k Gain of the I controller Tg Sampling time duration of a time slice T Integral time by means of this time the influence of the integral part is controlled on the manipulated variable also Known as integral action time Loop error at the time n 1 Loop error at the time n 1 etc o Loop error at the beginning of the calculations The following picture shows a jump in process value and step response of the controller EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC Pi rl Summary The PI controller has the following characteristics It sets the process value exactly to the command variable By so doing it tends to oscillate and is unstable It requires more time to carry out the control action than the P controller PI controller A PI controller reduces the loop error immediately and will eventually drive the loop error to zero MU Mp tM HK e k To Tee tM n Manipulated variable at the time n Fn Proportional part of the manipulated variable In Integral part of the manipulated variable In 1 Manipulated variable of the I controller at the time n 1 also called integral sum P Gain of the P controller k Gain of the I controller Nee Sampling time duration of a time slice Ti Integral ti
110. al function saves the process variable of an analog input to memory and sets the output when the output variable exceeds or drops below this stored value plus a configurable offset ar Manual EASY xLogie Micro PIL Connection Description A positive edge 0 to 1 transition at input En saves the analog value at input Ax Aen to memory and starts monitoring of the analog range Aen Delta Input Ax You apply the analog signal to be monitored at input Ax Use the analog inputs AI1 AI8 the analog outputs AQ1 and AQ2 0 10 Vis proportional to 0 1000 internal value Parameter A Gain Range of values 10 00 B Zero offset Range of values 10 000 Delta Difference value for the Aen on off threshold Range of values 20 000 p Number of decimals Range of values 0 1 2 3 Q is set reset depending on the stored analog value and the offset Parameter p number of decimals The two threshold parameters Threshold 1 and Threshold 2 can be provided by the actual value of another already programmed function Analog comparator Ax Ay Analog trigger Ax Analog amplifier Ax Analog multiplexer AQ Analog ramp AQ Analog math AQ PI controller AQ Data latching relay AQ Up Down counter Cnt Applies only to the display of Aen Ax and Delta values in a message text Timing diagram EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC En f Aen A A fos Aen A Description of the function A 0 to
111. al rule Actual value Ax internal value at input Ax gain offset Gain and offset calculation 103 User Manual EASY The gain and offset is calculated based on the relevant high and low values of the function Example 1 The available thermocouples have the following technical data 30 to 70 C O to 10 V DC i e O to 1000 in xLogic Actual value internal value gain offset thus 30 0 A B i e offset B 30 70 1000 A 30 i e gain A 0 1 Example 2 A pressure sensor converts a pressure of 1000 mbar into a voltage of 0 V and a pressure of 5000 mbar into a voltage of 10 V Actual value internal value gain offset thus 0 A B i e offset B 1000 1000 A 1000 i e gain A 4 Example of analog values Internal value xLogie Miero PLC User Manual xLogic Micro PLC 10 1000 1 200 800 b ft 10000 10000 ho hoo ft Ft0000 b bo boa p 6 5 Special functions list SF When you create your circuit program in xLogicsoft you find the special function blocks in the SF list You can invert the inputs of SFs individually i e the circuit program converts a logical 1 at the input into a logical 0 a logical 0 it converts into a logical 1 The table also specifies whether the relevant function can be set retentive Rem The following SFs are available View in xLogic Name of the special function Rem
112. alue Output ON if Value Output ON if Value Output ON if Value Output ON if Value Value N Value N Value N Value N Value N Value N Value N ae le Fa Pa 4 5 6 7 Operation The comparison value Value N can be configured It must be between 0 and 32760 A Validation B Value C Value N D Value N 7 EASY xLogie Micro PLC 6 5 53 Compare in zone m Short Description The COMP IN ZONE comparison function is used to compare one value between two set points the MIN and MAX values of the zone Connection Description Input ENABLE a discrete ENABLE FUNCTION input this input is Active if it is not connected Input VALUE TO MOVE BACKWARD is the input which is used to control backward cam COMPARE movement it moves one step backward at each rising edge digital status is changed from 0O to 1 A MIN VALUE input whose type is Integer Input MAX VALUE A MAX VALUE input whose type is Integer OUTPUT The OUTPUT indicates the result of the comparison when the ENABLE FUNCTIO input is active The OUTPUT does not change state when the ENABLE FUNCTION input is inactive Parameters From the Parameters window you can select the state of the output according to the result of the comparison ON in the zone the output will be active if the input value is between the two setpoints MIN and MAX OFF in the zone the output will be inactive if the input value is between the t
113. ameter assignment mode and in programming mode During parameter assignment xLogic is in RUN mode that is it continues executing the circuit program see the topic Configuring xLogic To work in programming mode you need to terminate the circuit program by calling the Stop command e Select the Start command on the main menu to set RUN mode e When the system is in RUN you can return to parameter assignment mode by pressing the ESC key e When parameter assignment mode is open and you want to return to programming mode select the Stop command from the parameter assignment menu and confirm Stop Prg prompt with Yes To do so move the cursor to Yes and confirm with OK Rule 2 Outputs and inputs e Always create your circuit program by working from the output to the input e You can connect an output to several inputs but not the same input to several outputs e Within the same program path you may not connect an output to an upstream input For such internal recursions you should interconnect flags or outputs Rule 3 Cursor and cursor movement The following applies when you edit a circuit program e You can move the cursor when it appears in the form of an underscore Press or to move the cursor in the circuit program Press OK to change to Select connector block Press ESC to exit programming mode e You select a connector block when the cursor appears as a solid square Press or to select a connect
114. amplifier Ax Analog multiplexer AQ Analog ramp AQ Analog math AQ PI controller AQ Data latching relay AQ Up Down counter Cnt Applies only to Ax Ay Delta On and Off values displayed in a message text Does not apply to the comparison of on and off values The compare function ignores the decimal point The value of On Off and Dec can be set modified in parameter mode For information about how to set modify refer to chapter 5 2 2 please Dec means decimal point ar Manual EASY xLogie Micro PLC Timing diagram Say Fux Ay Q for Ax Ay gt 200 On Off 200 Description of the function The function reads the value of the signal at the analog input Ax This value is multiplied by the value of parameter A gain Parameter B offset is added to the product hence Ax gain offset Actual value Ax Ay gain offset Actual value Ay Output Q is set or reset depending on the difference of the actual values Ax Ay and the set thresholds See the following calculation rule Calculation rule e If threshold On Threshold Off then Q 1 if actual value Ax actual value Ay gt On Q 0 if actual value Ax actual value Ay lt Off e If threshold On lt Threshold Off then Q 1 falls On lt actual value Ax actual value Ay lt Off Reducing the input sensitivity of the analog comparator You can delay the output of the analog comparator selectively by means of
115. and file name in this box 3 After the setup of the file saving path and file name click save to save file in the appointed path then complete to save file HEFE Config esasl File Edit Tools SMS View Help Hew a F ci m Open Ctr1lto A z eSusi Close Close All Documents Save Ctrlts Save AS Print Ctrl F er bit w Print Preview gh Print Setup Properties t Exit Fig 7 10 8 Save File Menu Operation Method of Printing File 1 Click option Print under menu File with left button of mouse 2 Dialog box as shown in Fig 7 10 9 appears set up your printing requirement according to the cue of dialog box 3 Click confirm with left button of mouse then your file will be printed in your printer EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC pF E k Fa Fa Eee ae m a J1 Phila EF ea ta ll 1 yam ua n e yp ee F 4 F are ioe ee a Ce li ie d Th m n TEA Fig 7 10 9 File Print 6 12 Modify Password and transfer the Program Operation Method a First of all link xLogic with your PC through the optional way RS232 cable USB cable need install driver first Ethernet connection b Open application software xLogicsoft set up a new document then open computer com Click option eee Configuration under menu Tools with left button of the mouse or click T in toolbar dialog box shown as 7 10 10 app
116. ard solution lu gt Ki Ko Sie 52 K2 Sde 34 K3 Kd KS KiB JOA Kalm tales KLT IKT E2 EA ELA ES N l Lighting lamp can be operated by pulse relay controlled by button besides the door Pulse relay can be repositioned by means of timer and lightness sensitivity switch Pulse relay may shorten pulse width of off command Required component EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC Daylight control switch B1 Timer T1 Pulse relay K1 and K2 pulse switch K3 K6 able to be switched off collectively Disadvantages of traditional solution In order to realize function it needs plenty of wiring Vast mechanical parts will result in obvious abrasion and high maintenance costs 6 Modification function can cause much work 8 5 2 The scheme of xLogic a lab N Daylight lamp Daylight lamp Daylight lamp Daylight lamp row row rows row Components S1 S4 make contact Momentary switch B1 make contact Daylight control switch Circuit diagram by xLogicsoft xLogie Micro PLC Benefits While power consumption of load does not exceed output of switch s voltage range lamp can be directly connected to xLogic main module however if power consumption of load exceeds output of switch s voltage range then power contactor would be required You can connect directly lightness sensitivity switch to the input of xLogic e Don t need external timer as this function has been int
117. are monitored by means of flow sensors If no air flow is registered after a short delay time has expired the system is switched off and an error message is generated which can be acknowledged by pressing the off button Fan monitoring requires an analyzer circuit with several switching devices in addition to the flow sensors A single xLogic device can replace this analyzer circuit 8 3 2 The scheme of xLogic The circuit diagram of ventilation system L exhaust air fresh air fan Required components Ki Main contactor K2 Main contactor e SO make contact Off button Si make contact On button er Manual EASY xLogie Micro PLC S2 break contact Flow monitor S3 break contact Flow monitor H1 Flashing lamp e H2 Flashing lamp xLogicSoft solution The use of xLogic reduces the amount of switchgear Thus you save installation time and space in the control cabinet You may even be able to use as a smaller control cabinet With xLogic you can also switch off of the fans sequentially after the system is switched off The circuit in xLogicSoft The system is switched on and off at the inputs I1 and I2 The fans are connected to outputs Q1 and Q2 the flow sensors are connected to the inputs I3 and 14 Blocks BO7 and B10 are used to set the watchdog times after which the flow sensors should send a signal to the fault output Q3 You can invert output Q3 to use output messages at Q4 Relay Q4 only
118. at the bottom Note xLogic can recognize read and switch the I O of all expansion modules regardless of their type The I Os are not presented in the installation order of the modules it rests with the address of the expansion modules For example the first input of the expansion module with the address 2 the symbol will be 121 The second output of the expansion module with the address 4 the symbol will be Q42 Refer to chapter 5 2 4 for how to set the expansion module address The following I Os and flag blocks are available for creating your circuit program I1 to I8 CPU I11 to 114 EXT1 121 to 124 EXT2 I31 to 134 EXT3 I81 to 184 EXT8 AI1 to AI4 CPU AI11 to AI14 EXT1 AI21 to AI24 EXT2 AI31 to AI34 EXT3 AI81 to AI84 EXT8 Q1 to Q4 CPU Q11 to Q14 EXT1 Q21 to Q24 EXT2 Q31 to Q34 EXT3 Q81 to Q84 EXT8 AQ1 to AQ2 CPU AQ11 to AQ12 EXT1 AQ21 to AQ22 EXT2 AQ31 to AQ32 EXT3 AQ81 to AQ82 EXT8 F1 to F64 and AF1 to AF64 Also available are the shift register bits S1 to S8 4 cursor keys C A P ch C and c See the Constants and connectors topic for more details The following applies to inputs AI1 AI2 AI3 and AI4 of ELC 12DC DA R TN TP and versions If you use I1 I2 I3 or 14 in the circuit program this input signal is digital If you use AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 the input signal is analog The expansion modules also adapt to this rules The illustration above with numbered AI inputs
119. ax 14kHz IB 1C Max 60k Hz 19 1A Max 14kHz IB 1C Max 60k Hz 19 1A Max 14kHz IB 1C Max 60k Hz 19 1A Max 14kHz IB 1C Max 60k Hz 19 IA Max 14kHz IB 1C Max 60k Hz 19 IA wy ELC E AI 1 DC12 24V DC12 24V isolated 485 converter used to bring out the terminals of RS485 port built in ELC 12 series CPU for connection with third party devices fe ele fe 2ch Q yes 5 Q6 2ch Q yes 5 Q6 ee T f 2ch Q yes yes 5 Q6 2ch Q yes yes m gt J Discontinued ELC 26AC R CAP ELC 26DC D R CAP ELC 26DC DA R CAP Discontinued ELC 26DC DA TN CAP Discontinued ELC 26DC DA TP CAP Discontinued ELC 26AC R HMI ELC 26DC D R HMI ELC 26DC DA R HMI ELC 26DC DA TN HMI ELC 26DC DA TP HMI SSR 12AC R H SSR 12AC R SSR 12DC DA R H SSR 12DC DA R YES YES YES YES YES YES J 0 o no 0 Supply voltage AC110 AC240V AC110 AC240V DC12 24V DC12 24V panel LCD CPU with 27 LED indicators COVER CPU with 27 LED indicators COVER CPU with 27 LED indicators COVER CPU with 27 LED indicators COVER CPU with 27 LED indicators COVER CPU with keypad panel LCD CPU with keypad panel LCD CPU with keypad panel LCD CPU with keypad panel LCD CPU with keypad panel LCD 8 digital 8 digital 4 0 10V 4 digital
120. base is shown 3 Press to move the cursor to the B of the shown block and then press to select the required block number 4 Press to move the cursor to the block s time base and press to select the required time base The view in parameter assignment mode example xLogie Micro PLC B12 B12 A K T 04 10h m T B006m TaN Ta 02 00h 1 current Ta 02 00h time Timing diagram Trg Mon eTa ei Ta J Lo TL Description of the function The time Ta the current time in xLogic is triggered with the O0 to 1 transition at input Trg If the status at input Trg stays 1 at least for the duration of the configured time T the output is set to 1 when this time has expired the on signal of the output follows the on signal of the input with delay The time is reset if the status at input Trg changes to 0 again before the time T has expired The output is reset to 0 when input Trg is 0 6 5 2 Off delay Tr R gd Short description The output with off delay is not reset until a defined time has expired Conmesion peseiro Input Trg Start the off delay time with a negative edge 1 to O transition at input Trg Trigger Reset the off delay time and set the output to O via the R Reset input Reset has priority over Trg Parameter T The output is switched off on expiration of the delay time T output signal transition 1 to 0 Retentivity on the status is retentive in memory User Manua
121. ber and PLC s IP pre configure in Device manager shall be configured as above figure shows Notes 1 The remote host IP address is the same as that of the PC in which the xLogicSoft being installed 2 Modbus Type in xlogic shall be MODBUS TCP 3 Active Connect must be AutoStart in device manager 5 Click Connect to PLC button and then the Ethernet module and PC will be linked After the ELC 22DC DA R N and PC being linked many features can come true e g downloading user program into xLogic CPU module uploading program into PC and online monitor monitor real time status of xLogic IO can be done herewith Ethernet module just plays a role of ELC RS232 USB cable A Upload program click Ei B Download program click j C Monitor program run status click T Option 2 ELC 22DC DA R N work under TCP serve mode xLogicsoft software acting as Client EASY onfig Modbus Type MODBUS TCP X PLC Address fi RS232 Ethernet Connect to PLC R5232 RS232 Port EOM z Eps 2600 m Basic Setting Channell Hostlistl Serial Sett Connectionl Password Setting Apply Settings Re Ethernet ace 8888 PICAS TE id C Server 0 Address Client 2 168 O oe Cancel Basic Setting Network Server Channel Chrannell ostlistl Serial Sett Password Setti Apply Settings Re Log Out xLogie Micro PLC IP Addres 192
122. ble You can also configure the on time to be a pulse signal The timer block will be activated at the specified time for one cycle and then the output is reset means No on off times set Setting the weekly timer To set the on off times 1 Move the cursor to one of the Cam parameters of the timer e g No1 2 Press OK xLogic opens the Cam parameter assignment screen form The cursor is positioned on the day of the week 3 Press amp and W to select one or several days of the week 4 Press a to move the cursor to the first position of the on time 5 Set the on time Modify the value at the respective position using the keys and Y Move to the cursor to the various positions using the keys lt and amp At the first position you can only select the eee User Manual EASY xLogie Micro PLC value means No on off times set 6 Press to move the cursor to the first position of the off time 7 Set the off time in same way as in step 5 8 Confirm your entries with OK The cursor is now positioned on the No2 parameter Cam2 and you can configure a further cam Special characteristics to note when configuring The block properties window offers a tab for each one of the three cams Here you can set the weekly on times for the cams Each tab offers you in addition an option of defining the on and off times for each cam in hour and minute units Hence the shortest switching cy
123. c Micro PLC Changing the time base You can change the pre warning time base and the period Time base Pre warning time Pre warning T period makes sense only for programs with a cycle time of lt 25 ms Description of the function Output Q is set to 1 with a O to 1 signal transition at input Trg The 1 to O transition at input Trg triggers the current time and output Q remains set Output Q is reset to 0 when Ta reaches the time T Before the off delay time T T has expired you can output a pre warning that resets Q for the duration of the off pre warning time Tu Ta is retriggered optional at the next high low transition at input Trg and if Ta is expiring If retentivity is not set output Q and the expired time are reset after a power failure Setting the Par parameter Note All times must have the same time base B9 1 R Protection mode and retentivity T 60 00s Off delay time T 05 00s 4 Start of the off warning period T T T L 00 10s Of warning time EASY xLogie Micro PLC View in parameter assignment mode example m aL B9 T 60 00s Ta 06 00s Current value of T 6 5 10 Multiple function switch Tr Far Short description Switch with two different functions Pulse switch with off delay Switch continuous light With a signal at input Trg Trigger you set output Q continuous light or reset Q with off delay Output Q can be reset w
124. can import the existed configuration by the menu Tools gt Import Config 3 DeviceMNanager 2 00 AAA Operate Language Help ess Physical Address 0 16 00 0 Oa 05 T3 dT Devi ceNam Shortcut Key CONEXTOP Netembed amp Device Networking Property Yalue Device Name NB L MAC Address 00 0 Qa 05 73 dT IP Address 192 168 0 16 Serial Ho Firmware Version System Uptime 7 2 Establish communication between CPU and xLogicSoft SCADA via Ethernet Note 1 Ethernet CPU can communicate with Touch screen SCADA via LAN port 2 Communication protocol is Modbus TOP Here we only introduce how to establish the connection between CPU and xlogicsoft via Ethernet 1 Connect the ELC 22DC DA R N as the first part and configure as the first part 2 Here are two options to open COM PORT ew A click i symbol B select menu Tools gt Configuration Option 1 Ethernet module in ELC 22DC DA R N works under TCP client mode xLogicsoft software acting as server EASY Communication Configuration RTU PLC Addres i Roe Modbus Type Ethernet f Ethernet Fort ooo oooO Seach 3 Select Ethernet option Communication Configuration x Modbus Type ETU PLC Address Rs232 fo B5232 RS232 Port CO r opps 5 Ethernet et eects age 2 5 h fe Ethernet Port 20g Serch ie Server ____ Address C Client 19 p a Connect
125. can period of the xLogic for current program Summer time Winter time Activate disable the conversion of the summer winter time Set Extended module Activate disable the expansion port of xLogic Only applied to Standard ELC 12 series CPU x Simulation simulate the xLogic program X Select Hardware Select the model of xLogic for programming X Edit Cover HMI Customers are allowed to edit the first page of the HMI by this menu X User manger File management program can be protected with different priorities X Set monit config select elements for monitoring or saving with Excel file 6 8 1 4 SMS The instruction is mainly used for SMS items The pull down menu is as the following fale Edit Tools SMS View Help General Settings Set SHS Contig Set Modbus Config Fig 10 4 SMS Menu X General Settings set PIN code and gsm provider selected EASY xLogie Micro PLC Setting General Settings Enter PIN 1 1234 Provider search Automatic C Manual GSM Service Provider GSM Service Center Generally you are not required to fill out the GSM provider because the xLogic unit can automatically search it But the GSM servers centre number need manually input and the xLogic also can save it The SIM card can be protected with a PIN code just like for normal cell phone use The PIN request is activated and the PIN code is inputted in the required field This concerns PIN1 Further information can be obtain
126. can wall mount xLogic you need to drill holes using the template shown below ELC 12 series 98 0 3 nx 48 0 3 All dimensions in mm Bore hole for M4 screw tightening torque 0 8 to 1 2 Nm 1 ELC 12 CPU 2 ELC12 E series extensions ELC 18 series EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC nx T2 0 5 All dimensions in mm Bore hole for M4 screw tightening torque 0 8 to 1 2 Nm 1 xLogic CPU 2 xLogic extensions ELC 6 series M4 screws l ELC 22 26 series EASY xLogie Micro PLC Unit mm 103 0 3 M4 screws SSR 12 Series CPU 3 3 Mounting ELC HMI FP ELC HMI FP Faceplate ELC HMI s installation unit making it possible for ELC HMI to be externally installed in the front door of cabinet for easy observation and operation while ELC 12 CPU is required to be installed inside To prepare the mounting surface for the optional ELC HMI FP and mount it follow these steps 1 Cut a 91 mm x 91 mm tolerance 0 5 mm hole in the mounting surface 9140 5 9140 5 EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC Put the ELC HMI into ELC HMI FP module 3 Fit the ELC HMI FP as the above figure not include the lock part into the cutout you made in the mounting surface 4 Attach the mounting brackets included to the ELC HMI FP E 1 Mounting brackets 2 Mounting lock 3 Cabinet door or control panel Thickness 1 5 to 8 5 mm 5 You can then
127. ch device reset block along with the Com status function block together in the program when there is no data transmission through the Ethernet port while the timeout period 50s is reached the com port status will output HI signal and then the Device reset block would be enabled and the Ethernet module will be reset for the Reset period in the device reset block property dialog box EASY User Manual BOO2 Comport status Parameter Comment Block name Channel Ethernet IFI x Time out 50 nal s Monit type TX RX z E 6 5 45 Comport Status Short description This function block is used to monitor the communication status of the RS232 programming port RS485 port Ethernet WIFI port With the text message block we can insert the com port status from such function block for displaying on the LCD eman oem O Enable the function block if a HI level at En input pin and if a trigger from HI to LOW the function would be disabled Parameter Channel RS232 RS485 Ethernet WIFI Timeout 1 100s Monitor type TX RX When a HI level at the En pin and the timeout is reached the output will be HI and it will be reset when the En is switched EASY xLogie Micro PLC BOOS Comport status Parameter Comment Block name Channel Time out Monit type m Parameters Channel RS232 This channel is the programming port it can be used to monitor or display the commu
128. ck On After input En is reset to 0 the message text is displayed until acknowledged by pressing the OK button The message text cannot be acknowledged as long as input En is high If several message text functions were triggered with En 1 the message with the highest priority 1 lowest 64 highest is displayed This also implies that a new message text is only displayed if its priority is higher than that of previously enabled message texts After a message text is disabled or acknowledged the function automatically shows the previously active message text that takes the highest priority You can press the d ana Y keys to step through multiple active message texts Example This is how two message texts could be shown Display field of xLogic in RUN mode Motor 5 STOP AT Example Message 10 12 text with priority 30 Action Example Message text with priority 10 MAINTENANCE Input P configuration From the input P you configure the following characteristics of the message text e Priority e Acknowledgement e Message destination EASY xLogie Micro PLC 4 Priority 4 Status of the acknowledgement 1 Increase the priority to 1 Cursor on 0 k 2 Change to Ack Press P 3 Enable Ack Press amp or Y xLogic shows Priority 1 Status of the acknowledgement On Restrictions Up to 64 message text functions are available for ELC 12 22 26 and upgraded ELC 18CPUs
129. ck then link every function block according to logic controlling relation thereby complete the protracting of a logic function graph In addition in order to help the users confirm if the function graph accord with the prospective controlling result xLogicsoft also provides most intuitionist function of simulation You can get the moving result of the program through simulation of the function graph 6 9 1 Open File 6 9 1 1 Open New File Operation method To open a new file click New option of menu File click once with left button of mouse As shown in the following fig EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC Open Close Close ALL Documents oe Ctrlt o Ctrlts Fig 7 9 1 Open New Document ILogiel Function block diagram FED Notes An option Window of outside meet extended module will appear before a new document opened General Comment Fage Layout Parameter Hardware ELC 6 Series ELC 1 Series ELC 18 Series J Standard ELC 15aC K ELC 1800C I k ELC 18D0C I TH ELC 1800 I TF ELC 18D0C DA R fel Known Blocks Constants Connectors Basic Functions Special Functions Timer Counter Analog Miscellaneous Maximum Resources Function Blocks REM Digital Inputs Digital Outputs Input Shift registe AND AHD Edge HANI On Delay Off Delay Up Down counter Hor Analog comparator Latching Relay Ful 256 40 260 254 aan E la
130. cle is one minute You can disable the on and off times individually i e you can achieve switching cycles extending across more than one day for example by setting the on time for cam 1 to Monday 7 00 h and the off time of cam 2 to Wednesday 13 07 h while disabling the on time for cam 2 Property x Farameter Cams 1 Cams 2 Cams 3 Comment Static Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Jw Disable Sunday cnet tar we Backup of the real time clock The internal real time clock of xLogic is buffered against power failure The buffering time is influenced by the ambient temperature and is typically 100 hours at an ambient temperature of 25 C EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC d 5 5 12 Yearly timer Caution Your xLogic must be equipped with an internal real time clock if you are going to use this SFB Short description The output is controlled by means of a configurable on off date C emaon OO O oe Parameter At the No cam parameter you set the on and off trigger for the cam of the yearly timer Output Q Q is set on when the configured cam is switched on Parameter The on and off trigger for the cam of the yearly timer can be set modified in parameter mode and you can configure what you need For information about how to modify refer to chapter 5 2 2 please Timing diagrams Example 1 Yearly mode on Mont
131. cro PLC 3 Register Params cy Here is to set the parameters of register all these registers have write property ff s BIT data can be used to set the register Q and F Q digital outputs QO01 a Q21 Q24 16 23 F digital flag Fl a WORD data can be used to set the register AQ and AF AQ analog outputs Q001 a a AF analog flags Name Address AF1 AF64 0 63 Count EASY Here is to set how many register you want to set once User Manual xLogic Micro PLC BO001 H1 Hemory Read Parameter Comment Block name File Params File Name OUTPUT EEL Record Title Q1 Q11 Data Type BIT fi Record Index Register Params Register Address Count file in SD card of ELC MEMORY This bit would be used to set the Q1 status 2011 01 3430 13 52125 O ee 2011 81 38 13 52 31 Q1 011 111100 0 10 HHAAHHAA 2011 81 38 13 52 37 Q1 911 1111 86661 66000000008 If the Memory Read block had been triggered the Q1 of ELC 12 CPU will be set 1 E002 M2 Quit Off 6 5 38 Word to Bit Short description This special function is used to transfer the word type data AI AF or AQ to 16 bit status 0 or 1 F or Q f EASY xLogie Micro PLC Input En Enable this function Reset output Q with a signal at input R Reset Parameter Retentivity set on the status is re
132. cro PLC The value of T can be set modified in parameter mode For information about how to modify refer to chapter 5 2 2 please Timing diagram Trg AL M Roo Woo o iris a Ta Seqpol herl Description of the function The current time Ta is triggered with a 0 to 1 signal transition at input Trg Output Q is set to 1 when Ta reaches the time T A further pulse at input Trg does not affect Ta The output and the time Ta are only reset to 0 with al signal at input R If retentivity is not set output Q and the expired time are reset after a power failure 6 5 5 Wiping relay pulse output Trg Par fo Short description An input signal generates an output signal of a configurable length Conmedion fpes OSS Input Trg You trigger the time for the wiping relay with a signal at A a UE Trg Trigger Parameter TL represents the time after which the output is reset output signal transition 1 to 0 Retentivity set on the status is retentive in memory Output Q A pulse at Trg sets Q The output stays set until the time has expired and if Trg 1 for the duration of this time A 1 to 0 transition at Trg prior to the expiration of T also resets the output to 0 Parameter The off time T can be provided by the actual value of another already programmed function Analog comparator Ax Ay Analog trigger Ax Analog amplifier Ax Analog multiplexer AQ Analog ramp AQ EASY User Manual xLogic Micr
133. ct Edit Press amp or Y 3 Confirm Edit Press OK If required enter your password and confirm with OK 4 Select Edit Prg Press or F 5 Confirm Edit Prg Press OK 6 Move the cursor to B2 the input of Q1 Press a 7 Confirm with OK 8 Now replace block B2 with block B1 at output Q1 The procedure Select the BN list Press or Accept the BN list Press OK Select B1 Press or User Manual EASY xLogie Micro PLC Apply B1 Press OK M a Result Block B2 is deleted because it is no longer used in the circuit Block B1 has replaced l1 2 21 1 5 6 Memory space and circuit program size The size of a circuit program in xLogic is limited by the memory space memory used by the blocks Up to 512 blocks can be used in xLogic Indication of available memory space xLogic shows you the amount of free memory space Proceed as follows 1 Switch xLogic to programming mode as a reminder refer to the topic The four golden rules for operating xLogic 2 Select Edit Press A or 3 Accept Edit Press OK 4 Select Memory Press or 5 Accept Memory Press OK The display now shows Chapter 6 Configuring amp Programming software Users who are familiar with the logic boxes of Boolean algebra can use the xLogicsoft In fact xLogicsoft adapts the function block programming way xLogicsoft is available as a programming package for the PC T
134. ction block calculates the proportion of the value Ax to the range The block sets the digital output Q high for the same proportion of the PT periodic time parameter and sets Q low for the remainder of the time period Examples with Timing Diagrams The following examples show how the PWM instruction modulates a digital output signal from the analog input value Example 1 Analog input value 500 range 0O 1000 Periodic time T 4 seconds The digital output of the PWM function is 2 seconds high 2 seconds low 2 seconds high 2 seconds low and continues in that pattern as long as parameter En high En Lo Max HK ee or eS ee enn Ax 500 PO edematous E S T E 2 SC 2 SEC 2 5EC i 2 58C 2 580 2 SECI 2 5eC EASY xLogie Micro PLC Example 2 Analog input value 300 range 0 1000 Periodic time T 10 seconds The digital output of the PWM function is 3 seconds high 7 seconds low 3 seconds high 7 seconds low and continues in that pattern as long as parameter En high En Max 1000 22 mnnn seen Axe QQ Min Q w nnnnennnnnnennnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn n sec Tse Q J sec 3 ec a Calculation rule Q 1 for Ax Min Max Min of time period PT Q 0 for PT Ax Min Max Min of time period PT Note Ax in this calculation refers to the actual value Ax as calculated using the Gain and Offset
135. d Back Cancel xLogie Micro PLC 5 If you want to accept the recommended file location click Next to Confirm Parsi Select Start Menu Folder Where should Setup place the program s shortcuts 5 ET Setup will create the program s shortcuts in the following Start Menu Folder To continue click Next Fou would like to select a different folder click Browse EASY ELCsatf Browse lt Back Cancel 6 In this example the program icon is to be placed on the desktop Use Next to proceed 2101 1 Select Additional Tasks i Which additional tasks should be performed Select the additional tasks you would like Setup to perform while installing ELCsott then click Next Additional cons W CreateQuickLaunchlcon Back Cancel EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC Ready to Install Setup i now ready to begin installing ELCsoft on your computer 5 x Click Install to continue with the installation or click Back if you want bo review or change any settings Destination location C Program Files EASYSELCsoft xLogicy 0 1 Start Menu folder EASY ELCsoft Additional tasks Additionallcons CreateDesktoplcon CreateQuickLaunchlcon r Cancel Back 7 Click Install button to install Program is being installed 2 Setup ELCsoft q iols 1 Installing Please Wait while Setup installs ELCsoft on your computer Extracting files
136. d up this system can supply drinkable water Requirements for the control system of service water pump It can provide service water all day under the contingency instance the control system must be able to be switched over to drinkable water system automatically When switching to drinkable water system it can t interlard rain water If rain container has not enough rain water service water pump can t be on rain water dry up protection 8 6 1 Standard solution EASY xLogie Micro PLC K3 od oe 3 KA Ka Sajpe ea Ka Ki Ke E KIDZ N Pump Exceed limit time Dry UP protection Drinkable source of rain water 8 6 2 The scheme of xLogic Pump Orinkable water Components K1 main contactor e Yi Solenoid valve e S1 Pressure switch S2 make contact Bobber switch water level S3 S4 break contact Bobber switch water level Function block diagram EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC Pressure switch I001 Pump Bobber switch uses to switch off rundry protection 1003 Bobber switch uses to switch on Bobber switch drinkable water uses to switch on rundry protectian 1004 Main water nlet Bobber switch uses to switch off I002 drinkable water m Chapter 9 Modbus function code and Register addresses 9 1 xLogic modbus function code The following table contains some communication orders supported by xLogic Length of Order Function
137. data transmission between master and slaves EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC BOO1 Transfer the I1 IA status from the master to the Q1 QA of the slavel Setting as follows xLogie Micro PLC BOO1 Nodbus Fritel Far ameter Comment Block name lw Show Parameters ave Address i Communi cate Params BFS 3600 Stopbits i Databits Te J Faritybit e atocol Modbus TCF bus TCF RTU kal Be Data Register Index High Low omer sti i5 Write Multiple Coils 2 T 10 Register addr Count Auto lata addr IT Address f B002 Transfer the I1 IA status from the master to the Q1 QA of the slave2 Setting as follows EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC BOO Hodbus Frite e 8 a Parameter Comment iar 19 Block name W Show Parameters lave Address fe Communi cate Farams BPS 9600 Stopbits 1 Iatabits 8 Paritybit Mone Conn Type Ethernet Y Timelut 5 1 105 Featocol Modbus TCP RTU gt Data Register Index Se Low omm arid jis Write A eee a Coils tegister addr Cll i amp huto Mio addi IT Address BOOS Read the I1 IA status from the slavel to the F11 F20 of the master Setting as follows EASY xLogie Micro PLC HOOS Eodbus Fead Parameter Comment Block name lw Show Parameters Communi cate Params EFS 9600 Stopbits h Databits
138. de When you select Edit after you have saved a password protected circuit program you are prompted to enter a password and to confirm it with OK You can only edit the program after you have entered the correct password 5 5 2 The first circuit program Let us now take a look at the following parallel circuit consisting of two switches Circuit diagram The corresponding circuit diagram S4 N S2 k1 The load is switched on with 51 OR 2 xLogic interprets this parallel circuit as an OR logic because 1 OR 2 switches on the output Translated into a xLogic circuit program this means Relay K1 is at output Q1 is controlled by means of an OR block Circuit program S1 is connected to the I1 and S2 to the I2 input connector of the OR block The corresponding layout of the circuit program in xLogic Wiring 73 EASY xLogie Micro PLC The corresponding wiring S1 switches input I1 while S2 switches input I2 The load is connected to the relay Q1 5 5 3 Circuit program input Let us now write the circuit program starting at the output and working towards the input xLogic initially shows the output You will see an underscore below the Q in Q001 which is the cursor The cursor indicates your current position in the circuit program You can move the cursor by pressing the A vY dand P keys Now press the a key The cursor moves to the left At this point you enter only the first
139. depending on the set thresholds Parameter On and Off The On and Off parameters can be provided by the actual value of another already programmed function Analog comparator Ax Ay Analog trigger Ax Analog amplifier Ax Analog multiplexer AQ Analog ramp AQ Analog math AQ PI controller AQ Data latching relay AQ Up Down counter Cnt Applies only to the display of On Off and Ax values in a message text Does not apply to the comparison of On and Off values The compare function ignores the decimal point The value of On Off and Dec can be set modified in parameter mode For information about how to set modify refer to chapter 4 2 2 please Dec means decimal point Timing diagram EASY xLogie Micro PLC Description of the function The function reads the value of the signal at the analog input Ax This value is multiplied by the value of parameter A gain Parameter B offset is added to the product hence Ax Gain Offset Actual value Ax Output Q is set or reset depending on the set threshold values See the following calculation rule Calculation rule If threshold On threshold Off then Q 1 if the actual value Ax gt On Q 0 if the actual value Ax lt Off If threshold On lt threshold Off then Q 1 if On lt the actual value Ax lt Off x Parameter Comment Sensor I Measurement Range Parameter Gain jo Offset jo Th
140. description message one frame Remarks code Hex order can deal with Read one group coil status 00000 Read Coil Status Output 0XXXX relay Fetch one group data of the status of Read input Status input switch input relay 10000 1XXXX Read data of multi holding register Read Holding Registers 40000 4XXXX Output register Force the switch status of single coil Force Single Coil 00000 0XXXX Pre set the data of single register Set single output register 40000 4XXXX Force multi coils on off data 00000 0XXXX Write multi holding registers data 40000 4XXXX User Manual EASY xLogie Micro PLC 9 2 Register addresses of xLogic ff a i Communication parameters settings PLC mode selection MODBUS RTU Communication parameter set Baud rates 9600 Data bit 8 Stop bit 1 Set address method Data format Attribute DECIMAL Digital quantity input ELC 6 CPU switch ELC 18 CPU ELC E 16 EXT1 ELC E 16 EXT2 Function Block in ELC E 16 EXT3 code 02 xlogicsoft EXM 12 ELC 12 CPU ELC12 E 8 EXT1 ELC12 E 8 EXT2 ELC12 E 8 EXT3 ELC 22 26 CPU ELC E 16 EXT1 ELC E 16 EXT2 ELC E 16 EXT3 4 cursors Cursor key 256 259 Function code 02 EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLG eeee aesesa lt ia ELC SMS D R 260 265 BIT SmsI1 SmsI6 Function code 02 Sms Message Input ELC SMS D R MsgI0l MsgI1 MsgI10 266 275 BIT Function code 02 Coils outputs E
141. drops out if main power is lost or if there is a fault in the system The output can then be used for a remote message User Manual xLogic Micro PLC 4 8 4 Factory door Flashing light Saftey bar Requirements for a gate control system In many cases a factory entrance is closed with roll gates Those gates are only opened when vehicles need to enter or leave the factory grounds The gate is controlled by the porter The sliding gate is opened and closed by means of a pushbutton control in the gatehouse The porter can monitor the gate operation The roll gate is normally fully opened or it is closed However gate movements can always be interrupted A flashing light is activated five seconds before the gate moves and while the gate is in motion A safety pressure strip ensures that people are not injured and that no objects are trapped and damaged when the gate is closing 8 4 1 Standard solution There are many different control systems for operating automatic gates The OPEN and CLOSE buttons initiate gate movements into the relevant direction provided it is not already moving in the opposite direction Movement of the gate is terminated either by means of the STOP button or the relevant limit switch EASY xLogie Micro PLC L1 S0 51 K3 K1 KI KA iit K6 f K5 Ki a mo KGE TO H OS K5C Ke Co open close flashinglight PN close 8 4 2 The scheme of xLogic The circui
142. e 2010 05 Starting in 2008 on the first day of each month the timer output switches on and switches off on the fifth day of the month The timer continues in this pattern through the last month of 2010 YYYY MM DD On 2008 01 Off 2010 05 1 Yearly On Monthly On YYYY MM DD YYYY MM DD Pulse Off 2008 01 2010 05 Description of the function The yearly timer sets and resets the output at specific on and off times The off date identifies the day on which the output is reset again The first value defines the month the second the day When you select the every month check box the yearly clock switches on or off at a certain day of every month Backup of the real time clock The internal real time clock of xLogic is buffered against power failure The buffering time is influenced by the ambient temperature and is typically 100 hours at an ambient temperature of 25 C Special characteristics to note when configuring A click on the dialog box enables direct keyboard input of the month and day values The values entered may not exceed the logical maximum of the relevant input boxes otherwise xLogicsoft returns an error message The calendar icon offers you an easy way of setting the date It opens a window where you can set the days and months by clicking the relevant buttons BOO1 81 Yearly Timer Parameter Comment Block name On Time OEE Time Month Das Month Day Monthly
143. e e Icons e g bulbs for monitoring outputs e Simulation control icons and e Time control icons se Oo 8 0 ifs l 2008 10 10 14 153 18 Simulation control icons Start simulation Stop simulation Hold simulation pause Time control If you have programmed a time sensitive circuit you should use the time control to monitor the reaction of your circuit program Start simulation for a specific time or number of cycles Set the period and the number of cycles using the following icons Setting the period and the time base for a time limited simulation or setting a specific number of cycles Display of the current time in xLogicsoft Modification of the current time in xLogicsoft User Manual xLogic Micro PLC IOUT OU 1003 04 O05 O06 TOO 100S KA fi Ej a00 WOU WOU a04 Layout of inputs The inputs are displayed in the form of key or switch icons The name of the input is displayed below the icon An open input represents an inactive switch When you click on the icon it is indicated active and the switch is shown in closed state Cee licon for pushbutton I1 not actuated lopen input pe licon for pushbutton I1 actuated loosed input 2 Icon for pushbutton I2 not actuated a open input 2 Icon for pushbutton 12 actuated closed input Layout of the outputs The status of an output is indicated by a light or dark bulb icon The
144. e 2 blocks free 510 blocks ory used report use 0 62 kbytes free 31 38 kbytes 1 93 a a a a a 1 Menu bar 2 Standard Toolbar 3 Programming Toolbar 4 Reference material Function block list 5 Info box Display memory Info IO status and analog IO values under simulation monitoring mode 6 Status bar Including current operation current CPU model and the communication status 7 Programming Interface Notes For the detailed operation please refer to Chapter 10 and Chapter 11 of this part EASY xLogie Micro PLC 6 7 Main Functions 0 Creat Simulate On line monitoring 0 Document 1 Edition function The main function of xLogicsoft is programming for xLogic By using the Logical Function Edition window of xLogicsoft you can create and edit your desired xLogic programs using various function blocks of xLogic and can also perform file operations such as save print program management etc 2 Simulation operation function After the program is edited you can view the program operation result on the computer and conveniently check if the said program meets your control requirements Here xLogicsoft provides you with a completely new off line test function through which you can debug the program without installing the xLogic on site With this function many inconvenience of the site test can be avoided 3 Real time monitoring xLogicsoft has a Real Time Monitoring window You can view the process of the contr
145. e value of the Lap time When En 0 and Lap 1 the output AQ outputs the value of the Lap time When En 0 and Lap O the output AQ outputs the value of the latest current time 211 ar Man EASY xLogie Micro PLC When R 1 both the current time and the Lap time are reset ome a 6 5 41 Analog filter Short Description connection es O Oo Analog Inputs Analog Outputs Analog Flags he block number of a function with analog output Parameter Sn Number of samples determines how many analog values are sampleq within the program cycles that are determined by the set number of Samples xLogic samples an analog value within every program cycle The number of program cycles is equal to the set number of samples Possible settings 8 16 32 64 128 256 Output AQ AQ outputs an average value of the analog input Ax over the current number of samples and it is set or reset depending on the analog input anc the number of samples Analog inputs O to 10 V corresponds with O to 1000 internal value Parameter You can set the number of samples to the following values BOOS ANS Analog filter Parameter Comment Block name Time Base ocg Protection Active EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC Description of function The function outputs the average value after sampling the analog input signal according to the set number of samples This SFB can reduce the error of analog input
146. ears then select your communication port and speed Option A RS232 This option is used when you use the ELC RS232 or ELC USB relative driver needed cable Option B Ethernet This option is used when you use the ELC E Ethernet module Option C GPRS This option is used when you has established the GPRS connection between xLogic and PC Communication Configuration Modbus Type MODES RTU v He ieee RS232 R5232 RS232 Port COMI z Bps 9800 X Ethernet C Ethernet Port Sere PLC s IP 0 Address cancel Fig 7 10 10 Set Up Port and Baud Rate 1 Setup Password and Time I xLogic permits you to set up password for your Program Only after input of right password you can write read and modify your Program x ar Manual EASY xLogie Micro PLC Operation method of setup password a Click Tools gt transfer gt Password set with left button of mouse dialog box shown as Fig 7 10 11 appears Set Password Old Fassword Hew Fassword Fig 7 10 11 Modify password You can modify communication password of your xLogic mainframe in this dialog box b Input new password in edit box after New Password write to xLogic II You can set up time for xLogic Operation Method c Clink option Tools gt transfer gt Set xLogic time with left button of the mouse or clink Elp under toolbar dialog box appears shown as Fig 7 10 12 Set EX
147. ed Value range 10 000 to 20 000 User Manual EASY xLogie Miero PLC StSp Start Stop offset value that is added to Offset B to create the start stop level If the Start Stop offset is 0 then the start stop level is Offset B Value range 0 to 20 000 Rate Speed with which level 1 level 2 or Offset is reached Steps seconds are issued Value range 1 to 10 000 A Gain Value range O to 10 00 B Offset Value range 10 000 p Number of decimal places Value range 0 1 2 3 The output AQ is scaled using the formula Current Level Offset B Gain A Output AQ Note When AQ is displayed in parameter mode or message mode it is displayed as an un scaled value engineering units current level Value range for AQ 0 32767 Parameter p number of decimal places The level parameters Levell and Level2 can be provided by the value of another already programmed function Analog comparator Ax Ay Analog trigger Ax Analog amplifier Ax Analog multiplexer AQ Analog ramp AQ Analog math AQ PI controller AQ Data latching relay AQ Up Down counter Cnt Parameter p only applies for displaying the values of AQ level 1 level 2 MaxL StSp and Rate in a message text Timing diagram for AQ EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC En 3 Sel MeaxL Level 2 Level 1 StSp B HOO ms HOO ms i000 me Description of function If the i
148. ed from the SIM card manual Likewise the process of unblocking the SIM card after three incorrect inputs of PIN1 is described in the SIM manual In order to do this the SIM card must be removed from the xLogic and inserted into a mobile phone Now the card can be unblocked according to the details of the network providers Note 1 The xLogic unit do not check the PIN code you set if the SIM card without PIN code protection 1 The xLogic unit shall not log in the GSM network unless the correct PIN code inputted if the PIN request of SIM card is activated X Set SMS config Active or disable SMS mode RS485 port will be only worked with SMS module if SMS model ticked any other device cannot use the RS485 BUS anymore this command is only applied to ELC 18 ELC 22 and ELC 26 series CPU Select Language Language Data Register Index of Modbus oF a Set SMS Config Sms Model File Optimization Config g Set Extended module 5 Set PLC Source Type io ie cua X Set Modbus config Change the MODBUS data format based on the device which will communicate with xLogic EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC Select Language Language Data Register Index of Modbus High low C Low High Set SMS Config js File Optimization Config IV Set Extended module is Set PLC Source Type 6 8 1 5 View This instruction is to display the status bar workspace and the Information window and so on The pull dow
149. egrated in xLogic It can be installed in a small sized cabinet so quite space saving Less equipment Quite easier to modify lighting system According to your demand you may setup supplementary on off timing lamp can be switched off in order at the end of day Easier to apply role of lightness sensitivity switch to lamp or already modified lamp row 8 6 Rainwater pump Nowadays besides drinkable water in family rainwater applications is gradually increasing In this way much costs can be saved also environment can be improved as well The application of rain water as follows User Manual xLogic Micro PLC Wash clothes Water system in garden Potted plant water e Wash car e Scour W C The following figure is to tell you how to run the rainwater application system Rain water SOUrCe Kd Pressure switch Drinkable water see Bae Berprdag Ce i er ean Gd ij a a ES 8 8 a D t eth e Control switchboard E anani ii mon 6 8 ee Ce a om eb a 8 oe aratati il a i Pressure container Container for rain water Service water conduit Off drinkable water On drinkable water when the dry up protection set is off The dry up protection set of rain water be on The rain water is collected in the container and then pumped to service water ductwork through pumping station So you can apply rain water as drinkable water If the rain water in the container drie
150. els Fassword Setting Apply Settings Re Log Out Time Zone wee OAC A A P sie sie A teb Console Telnet Console Set time server IF address Basic Settings You can rename the Device name default is NB L After you click the OK button the settings in the current dialog box would be set into the CPU ontig EJ n Basic Setting IF Confi guration i Server ETA o fe Ch 11 o ee BOOTP IP Address 192 166 0 16 Fassword Setting Apply Settings Re DHCP Subnet 255 255 255 0 means Auto IP Gateway 192 168 0 1 Preferred DHS Server Bac Address 192 168 0 1 00 0 Oa 05 T3 dT Alternate IHS Server Auta Hezotiate ige i680 Speed 100Mbps Duplex Full ae SS Se Network settings You can view the network parameters in such table EASY xLogie Micro PLC Basic Setting Hetwork Server Channels Channell Poceyar a tee ARF cache Timeout Fo Apply Settings he Log Out CFU Performance Mode HITF Server Fort ATUSi ze Success take Boers ontigz Basic Setting Hetwork Serial Port Options Enable Server Channels Channel Protocol R232 v FIFO Data Bits 8 oe Baud Rate qB00 Ml Flow Control Serial Settir Conmectionl Parit HOHE w Stop Bit 1i wM ka y op Bits Fassword Setting Apply Settings Rest Enable Packing Enable Log Out a Idle Gap Time Match 2 Byte Sequence sendFrameUnly send Trailing Bytes Success
151. en connected Input ANGLE Timer command input from 0 to 359 The outputs vary according to this value and the OUTPUT STATE parameter Output 1 is related to the value in the OUTPUT 1 column in the OUTPUT STATE table If the value of the angle in the ANGLE input is higher or the same as a value N in the ANGLE column in the OUTPUT STATE table and less than the value N 1 i the table the value of the corresponding OUTPUT 1 column is copied to OUTPUT 1 gt output at ON 0 gt output at OFF Output 2 is related to the value in the OUTPUT 2 column in the OUTPUT STATE table If the value of the angle in the ANGLE input is higher or the same as a value N in the ANGLE column in the OUTPUT STATE table and less than the value N 1 i the table the value of the corresponding OUTPUT 2 column is copied to OUTPUT 2 1 gt output at ON 0 gt output at OFF Parameters NUMBER OF DEGREES Equivalent to the wheel step number 2 to 72 steps of 5 to 180 OUTPUT STATES Table is listing the output states for each position These states can be modified by left clicking in the corresponding boxes 6 5 49 Pumps Management Short description APPLICATION SPECIFIC FUNCTION PUMPS MANAGEMENT TANK MANAGEMENT WITH CIRCULAR PUMP CHANGEOVER This function is used to set to ON a maximum of four digital outputs which can be activated OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 4 This number is equal to the maximum number of digital inputs from 2 to 4 in the
152. ended taking the time to read this manual before putting the xLogic Micro PLC to work Installation programming and use of the unit are detailed in this manual The feature rich xLogic Micro PLC provides a for off line operation mode allowing full configuration and testing prior to in field service commissioning In reviewing this manual you will discover many additional advantageous product properties it will greatly simplify and optimize the use of your xLogic Micro PLC Valid range of this manual The manual applies to devices of ELC series modules For more information about SMS module or Ethernet module please refer to the SMS module or Ethernet module user s manual EASY xLogie Micro PLC Safety Guideline This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety as well as to prevent damage to property The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol notices referring to property damage only have no safety alert symbol The notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger Caution Indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken Caution With a safety alert symbol indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken Caution Without a safety alert symbol indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken A
153. eplace mini PLC multiple timers relays and counters Splitting the difference between a timing relay and a low end PLC Each CPU houses a real time clock and calendar and supports optional expansion I O modules to enhance your control and monitoring applications Data adjustments can be done via the on board keypad and LCD display or with xLogicsoft It can be either DIN rail or panel mounted depending upon the needs of your application and it is available in 120V 240V ac as well as 12V and 24V dc versions and it is the ideal solution for relay replacement applications simple control applications such as building and parking lot lighting managing automatic lighting access control watering systems pump control or ventilation systems in factory and home automation and applications in which cost is a primary design issue 1 2 Highlight feature 4 lines 10 characters per line backlight display 16 characters per line for ELC 22 26 amp SSR 12 series CPU Multiple value display and input via keypad and LCD display Key panel programming feature optional Function Block Diagram e e Standard Modbus RTU ASCII TCP communication protocol supported It s optional for xLogic to act as slave or master in certain Modbus RTU communication network CAN BUS protocol based expansion modules ELC 18 22 26 series CPU Expandable up to 9 linked IO expansion modules reaching 162 I O points in maximum 1 RS232 port and
154. er inputs Cursor keys can save switches and inputs and allow operator control of the circuit program xLogic Micro PLC witch the screen to current page above shows by pressing the Left or Right key and press ESC key and arrow keys at the same time then the corresponding cursor keys will turn on and give off a high trigger 6 2 3 Outputs Output blocks represent the output terminals of xLogic You can use up to 4 outputs In your block configuration you can assign an output block a new terminal provided this terminal is not already used in your circuit program The output always carries the signal of the previous program cycle This value does not change within the current program cycle 6 2 4 Permanent logical levels HI and LO hila Set the block input to logical hi hi high to set it permanently to logical 1 or H state leta Set the block input to logical lo lo low to set it permanently to logical O or L state 6 2 5 Panel Key It is the symbol of the Function key on the panel F1 F4 If one of the function keys is pressed down the status of the corresponding symbol in the program shall turn from 0 to 1 And it shall give off one high trigger EASY xLogie Micro PLC 7 x amp 2013 OE The function Info age Simulate Ge Simulate I 0 10 Analog 1 0 key 1 shall L M 1 12 13 14 I5 6 VF 18 meron OOOO OOO0O Press down Notes
155. er reserve Connection cables Ambient temperature Storage temperature Degree of protection Certification 331 12 digital none 110 240V AC 85 265 V AC 100 253 V DC max 40 V AC 0 03 mA min 79 V AC 0 08 mA 6 relays 10 A with resistive load 2 A with inductive load External fuse required 2 Hz with resistive load 0 5 Hz with inductive load lt 0 1 ms functio n Yes typ 10h 12 digital none 12 24V DC 10 8 V 28 8 V DC max 3 V DC imA min 8 V DC 1 5 mA 6 relays 10 A with resistive load 2 A with inductive load External fuse required 2 Hz with resistive load 0 5 Hz with inductive load ms function Yes typ 10h 2x 1 5mm ori x 2 5 mm Oto 55 C 40 C to 70 C IP20 CE 12 digital 8 0 to 10V 12 24V DC 10 8 V 28 8 V DC max 3 V DC imA min 8 V DC 1 5 mA 6 relays 10 A with resistive load 2 A with inductive load External fuse required 2 Hz with resistive load 0 5 Hz with inductive load ms function Yes typ 10h ser Manual 12 digital none 12 24V DC 10 8 V 28 8 V DC max 3 V DC imA min 8 V DC 1 5 mA transistors PNP 0 3A External fuse required 10Hz lt 0 1 ms function Yes typ 10h 12 digital 8 0 to 10V 12 24V DC 10 8V 28 8 V DC max 3 V DC 1mA min 8 V DC 1 5 mA
156. error to detect Zero represents the zero division bit set by the analog math instruction at the end of its execution 1 if the error occurred O if not OF represents the overflow bit set by the analog math instruction 1 if the error occurred 0 if not Zero division OR Overflow represents the logical OR of the zero division bit and the overflow bit of the referenced analog math instruction Output Q represents the output of the analog math error detection function An x indicates that the bit can be either O or 1 with no influence on the output Error to Output Detect Zero division Zero division EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC division OR Overflow division OR Overflow division OR Overflow division OR Overflow If the Referenced Analog Math FB is null then the output is always 0 Setting the Par parameter The parameters MathBN AutoRst and Err can be set in programming mode or parameter assignment mode View in programming mode example Block number of an already programmed analog math instruction 4 Auto Reset Y or N 4 ZD OF or 7D OF Use the and P keys to navigate between the MathBN AutoRst and Err parameters To change a value use the A and Y keys to scroll through value choices for each value Use the OK key to accept changes 6 5 32 Modbus Read En Hr G Far Short description When there is a high level at En the Modbus Read block will be activa
157. es 226 ep oR 0g Bla ea n ra E A ee eee en ee ee 228 5 51 COMPAL ISOM Or VA E Sann A taney A 230 yi MUCO E a A E E E E E E E N 231 CoS OnO TE E a E E E E E OE OET ANA E 232 65 54 CONvVersion Word DIES ciceseecsocnuscietnssoncseantunaternetdonspeceaniateahetaeeiaya a AE E NEEE 233 EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC 6S SE COM VEI SION OILS VV OIG sactee see seep ceentevinees iann E acti EE NO denna nee en pu EEEN 233 omnes om Blea ie lia e i gt lt a1 a cr mmrrrn rete reer errr E E errr etre cr errant E E oy ona rere werent reir 234 i ME Nicest ett tte cetacean deme ucienen cede EET E OOR 235 eMe es ANID oo lt al ge urea E E A E E tenner ere EE A A A eee re 236 D are BOO E ena E E N OE OA N A TOE er 236 S C EE E E ey ateudedeesaen ratte 237 Oe Bea eci6 ir E E A N E E A E E A E E re ne arte 238 7 Mam FCO eE N E E T N 244 ERED os pe ole MAG cid ge ES ae E N E O A E AAE E T EE A E A A T 244 Ci in di EN D e a E E E E E A E 245 ER e PE E Ol E EI EE A EE AI IAA ee N I T 245 SS A E E NE A E E A T A EE EE AAIE T O E A eee E re ee er 246 Co T seca es carotene A A EE E A ET 246 68 FA SMS a e E E E E E E E E 247 oo MS 21 T E E E E EE E E EA E A E E E E ee ee 249 n LE A E E ee 249 CS TOOD o a A EE EE EE AEN E E A EE TE 250 a PO T O E a A E T EE T re 250 6 8 4 Simulation Tool and status Wi GOW esonera n O E iad sueetibuacunimaesedl 252 SIBE ODE e E a E A E N nea ates 254 Ci OS Ii Flea N EE AEE EEO O 254 Hog i Ma
158. es priority over all other inputs and resets the outputs Trg Trigger This input is used to trigger the start of a function Cnt Count This input is used for counting pulses Fre Frequency Frequency signals to be evaluated are applied to this input Dir Direction This input determines the direction of count En Enable This input enables a block function When this input is 0 other signals to the block will be ignored Inv Invert A signal at this input inverts the output signal of the block Ral Reset all All internal values are reset Parameter inputs At some of the inputs you do not apply any signals You configure the relevant block values instead Examples Par Parameter This input will not be connected Here you set the relevant block parameters times on off thresholds etc No Cam This input will not be connected Here you configure the time patterns P Priority This is an open input Here you define priorities and specify whether a message is to be acknowledged in RUN _ User Manual EASY xLogie Micro PLC 6 4 2 Time response m Parameter T In some of the SFs it is possible to configure a time value T When you preset this time note that your input values are based on the time base set tme base s seconds seconds 1 100 seconds Setting a time T of 250 minutes Unit in hours h 04 00 hours 240 minutes 00 10 hours 10 minutes
159. escription When a high level in En the Modbus Write block will be activated and the xLogic could communicate with peripheral as a master via RS232 or RS485 interface further the output will be switched on when the communication is established successfully Otherwise the output Q pin is kept off it means communication has failed A signal at input R resets output Q and disable this block at the same time connection oes OOOO Input En A high signal at En input will enable Modbus Write function block to be activated Input R Reset the value read from peripheral and set the output to 0 via the R Reset input Reset has priority over En Parameter Slave address 1 is default Communication protocol Modbus RTU Communication parameter baud rate BPS Data bits Stop bits Parity Overtime response time out Comm Type RS232 or RS485 Communication interface of xLogic Data register Index High Low Low High Command 05 Write Single Coil 06 Write Single Register 15 Write Multiple Coils 16 Write Multiple Registers Register start address count Output Q Q is set or reset depending on the communication status Successful communication Q 1 Failed communication Q 0 The Property in dialog box of Modbus Write shows as below figure EASY xLogie Micro PLC BO01 Modbus Frite t i Far ameter Comment Block name o ommani cate F BPS eoo gt Stopbits i 2 Databits E Parit
160. esistive load 0 5 Hz with inductive load lt 0 1 ms function Yes typ 100h 2x 1 5mm or 1x2 5 mm AN tO ae 55 SC 40 C to 70 C IP20 CE On 35 mm standard mounting rail 4 MW or wall mounting WXHXD W X H X D W XH XD 133 x 90 x 58 mm 95 x 90 x 68 mm PC cable RS232 or USB Yes Yes Yes modbus 512 blocks Yes Yes IB IC 60KHZ 15 16 14KHZ 1B IC 60KHZ NO Yes Yes Yes 95 x 90 x 68 mm W XH X D 133 x 90 x 58 mm NO xLogie Micro PLE xLogic Micro PLC xLogie Micro PLC A 3 Switching capacity and service life of the relay outputs Ohmic load Switching cycles million os 24 VDOC Maximum 10 110Ve2407 Maximum 10 2 amp 10 Switched currentiA Figure A Switching capacity and service life of the contacts with ohmic load heating Inductive load Switching cycles million 247 DC Maximum 2 A 1 0 110 240 V 40 Maximum 34 Switched curreniiA Figure B Switching capacity and service life of the contacts with high inductive load contactors solenoid coils motors EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC S34 REVISION RECORD Fa Description 6 5 18 1 How to change parameters of blocks in displayed message had been added Changed the naming rule
161. evices Up to 256 for xLogic CPU can be used when programming In your block configuration you can assign a new number to the analog flag provided this flag number does not already exist in your circuit program The output always carries the signal of the previous program cycle This value does not change if the communication were failed Notes 1 The address of AF can be found in the modbus communication protocol file 2 Keep the input pin of AF NULL do not connect with other blocks if you want to use the write property Input pin Updated function from October 2014 1 You can set a start value for the AF1 AF64 and the value does not lost if the power was failure so you can use such AF in your program as a number input from the touch screen or the panel key of the CPU Notes 1 AF65 AF256 does not support such function start value settings and the value of AF65 AF256 will be lost if the power is failure 2 If you enable the start value option of AF then you are not allowed to connect any other function to the input leg of the AF 3 If you connect the input leg of AF block to other function blocks the start value will not be available anymore 6 3 Basic functions list GF Basic functions represent simple logical elements of Boolean algebra You can invert the inputs of individual basic functions i e the circuit program inverts a logical 1 ata relevant input to a logical 0 if O is set at the i
162. f A block input that is not used x is assigned x 0 97 User Manual _ EASY xLogie Micro PLC Logic table of the NOR function a 6 3 7 XOR The XOR in a circuit diagram shown as series circuit with 2 changeover contacts i G Symbol in xLogic The XOR exclusive OR output is 1 if the signal status of the inputs is different A block input that is not used x is assigned x 0 Logic table of the XOR function O oe Sa ee ee eee EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC 6 3 8 NOT A break contact in the circuit diagram Symbol in xLogic The output is 1 if the input is 0 The NOT block inverts the input status Advantage of the NOT for example xLogic no longer requires break contacts You simply use a make contact and convert it into a break contact with the help of the NOT function Logic table of the NOT function 6 3 9 Boolean Function The BOOLEAN function gives the value of the output according to the combination of inputs The function has four inputs and therefore 16 combinations These combinations can be found in a truth table for each of these the output value can be adjusted The number of configurable combinations depends on the number of inputs connected to the function Non connected inputs are set to 0 The following diagram shows an example of part of the Boolean function truth table EASY xLogie Micro PLC o e u C a ee ee ee eee
163. f outputs controlled parameter is fixed at 4 On initialization PILOT OUTPUT NUMBER has the value 1 On initialization if the tank is in the state indicated and if a sensor above the water is in the ON state when the user program is executed the INPUT 1 and INPUT 2 inputs are ON INPUT 3 and INPUT 4 are OFF and OUTPUT 1 and OUTPUT 2 are ON Assuming that the tank is full INPUT 2 changes to OFF and OUTPUT 1 changes to OFF PILOT OUTPUT NUMBER indicates the value 2 Assuming that the tank is empty INPUT 2 changes back to ON OUTPUT 3 changes to ON and OUTPUT 2 remains ON Assuming that the tank refills INPUT 2 changes back to OFF OUTPUT 2 changes to OFF and PILOT OUTPUT NUMBER indicates the value 3 Assuming that the tank continues to refill INPUT 1 changes to OFF OUTPUT 3 changes to OFF and PILOT OUTPUT NUMBER indicates the value 4 6 5 50 Defrost short Description The defrost output changes to ON when the input temperature is less than the minimum temperature for a time T T being the cumulative duration of passages below the minimum temperature If the temperature rises to higher than the maximum temperature during the defrost cycle the defrost output reverts to OFF even if it has not finished This output can be triggered and stopped by means of the EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC orresponding inputs Description function validation input The function remains inactive for as long as th
164. ff 00 005 00 005 Fig 7 10 5 Tips on connecting blocks 1 Move the mouse pointer over a block and briefly hold it in this position The name of the block is shown maa User Manual EASY xLogie Micro PLC The name of the block input appears when you move the mouse pointer onto the input 2 To make it easier for you to interconnect blocks a blue frame around the mouse pointer pops when it is captured by a pin Rules for connecting blocks The following rules apply to the connection of blocks 1 You can connect a single input to multiple outputs 2 You cannot connect multiple inputs to a single output You cannot interconnect I O in the same path of a circuit program Recursion is not permitted Interconnect a flag or output if necessary Special function blocks also have green connectors These do not represent connecting pins but are used instead for assigning the parameter settings Analog I O cannot be connected to digital I O 6 9 2 4 Delete Function Block or Delete Link When you put some needless block in program interface or link some default ones you need to delete them as follows 1 Pitch on module or link to delete with mouse 2 Press Delete in the keyboard or click right button of the mouse select option Delete in the menu then you can delete the module or link 6 10 Simulation Running xLogicsoft could edit function diagram and perform function of simulation operation
165. ff and Ax values in a message text Does not apply to the comparison of On and Off values The compare function ignores the decimal point Timing diagram A Function with negative difference Delta Timing diagram B Function with positive difference Delta Of On A Description of the function The function fetches the analog signal at input Ax Ax is multiplied by the value of the A gain parameter and the value at parameter B offset is added to EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC product i e amp Ax gain offset actual value of Ax Output Q is set or reset depending on the set On threshold and difference value Delta The function automatically calculates the Off parameter Off On Delta whereby Delta may be positive or negative See the calculation rule below Calculation rule When you set a negative differential value Delta the On threshold gt Off threshold and Q 1 if the actual value Ax gt On Q 0 if the actual value Ax lt Off See the timing diagram A When you set a positive differential value Delta the On threshold lt the Off threshold and Q 1 if On lt the actual value Ax lt Off See the timing diagram B 6 5 26 Analog multiplexer CIT F 3 Par Short Description This special function displays O or one of 4 saved analog values on the analog output Input En 1 on input En Enable switches dependent on S1 and S2 a parameterized ana
166. fier Ax Analog multiplexer AQ Analog ramp AQ PI controller AQ Up Down counter Cnt Data latching relay AQ Analog Math AQ The value of On Off can be set modified in parameter mode For information about how to modify refer to chapter 5 2 2 please Timing diagram eo T D oT a A N E Fre hnnnnnnnnremannannnnnnnnimna nrn neS B f fo 8 25 Of 5 fa Input frequency ar Manual EASY xLogie Micro PLC Description of the function M a The trigger measures the signals at input Fre The pulses are captured during a configurable period G_T CA A Q is set or reset according to the set thresholds See the following calculation rule Calculation rule If the threshold On gt threshold Off then Q 1 if fa gt On Q 0 if fa lt Off If the threshold On lt threshold Off then Q 1 if On lt fa lt Off 6 5 16 Latching relay T7003 ar Short description A signal at input S sets output Q A signal at input R resets output Q Connection veserpnon Input S Set output Q with a signal at input S Set Reset output Q with a signal at input R Reset Output Q is reset if S and R are both set reset has priority over set Parameter Retentivity set on the status is retentive in memory Q is set with a signal at input S and remains set until it is reset with signal at input R No parameter of Latching relay can be set modified in parameter mode
167. g comparator Ax Ay Analog trigger Ax Analog amplifier Ax Analog multiplexer AQ Analog ramp AQ Analog math AQ PI controller AQ Data latching relay AQ Up Down counter Cnt The value of TH TL can be set modified in parameter mode For information about how to modify refer to chapter 5 2 2 please Timing diagram Description of the function With the change at input Trg to 1 the time T time low is triggered After the time T has expired output Q is set to 1 for the duration of the time Tu time high If input Trg is retriggered prior to the expiration of the preset time TL Tu the time Ta is reset and the pulse pause period is restarted EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC retentivity is not set output Q and the time are reset after a power failure etting the Par parameter View in programming mode example B25 1 R Protection mode and retentivity TL 02 00s 4 interpulse width TH 03 00s 4 Pulse width 4 Number of pulse pause cycles example View in parameter assignment mode example B25 TL 02 00s TH 03 00s Ta 01 15s 4 Current pulse width T or T 6 5 7 Asynchronous pulse generator En Iny Par Description of function The pulse shape at the output can be modified via a configurable pulse pause ratio comesion ton Input En You enable disable the asynchronous pulse generator with the signal at input En Input Inv The Inv in
168. g settings is very important to you ser Manual EASY xLogie Micro PLC tite om Ries a ni Figure 4 3 Above contents is used to tell you how to make the user s PC with the Ethernet module in the same network segment How to configure Ethernet module built in ELC 22DC DA R N IP address Start Ethernet module IP address configuration software Step one Double click the file DeviceManager in CD and then the following contents will pop out Devi ceManager for Ethernet CPU ETL rh CHS CJ zh CHT Update DeviceManagement CONFIG 2 1 KE DeviceManagement DeviceManazgement DeviceManagement Devi cellanagement DeviceNanazement Intermediate file wshost clr exe CONFIG Iti i MANIFEST 214 3T E Microsoft Corpor 1 EE 1 EE dmdll dil IsSharplode Shar setting ini L002 0 65 2 329 resources dll AET dmdll SharpZiplib for 1 KEE Update exe a date ini VES er see Update i eee Microsoft Source illevice 1 EB 1 EE Step two Select DeviceManagement exe file and start it with double click the left key of your mouse EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC 2 DeviceNanager 2 00 Cel x Operate Tools Language Help 2A m O 4 7 mi O DeviceName IP Address Physical Address Te a Value Hevies Hame MAC Address IP Address Serial No Firmware Version System Uptime Ready In order to enab
169. guage of the Menu Refer to chapter 4 3 6 for detail 4 3 1 How to switch Run Stop You should first select FUNCTION PAGE Read 4 3 1 Move the cursor to Run stop Press A or key ser Manu xLogie Micro PLC 2 Move the cursor to Yes Press OK key L M MW l2 l3 14 15 I6 I7 ls 13 lA IB IC ID 114115 6 0 00 000 0 000 0 0 0000 ELC 260C DA A oy a OL OLY LLL Ld F U5 OE GF 08 09I DIO After pressing ESC key you ll find out your circuit program has changed to stop status as figure below shows L M o l2 l3 l4 I5 I6 I7 l l5 l IB IC ID 114115 H6 ELC 260C 04 F POOOOOOOOOO0000 a bea La Lea OLY OLY OLY Ld 1 a2 03 Q4 G5 QE 4 3 2 Set parameter If you want to select a parameter you need do as the following procedures 1 Under the FUNCTION PAGE select Set parameter Press A or key Run s top gt rt Param 2 Confirm by pressing OK key Then xLogic displays the first parameter so you can modify as you like If there is no parameter to set modify you can press ESC key to return User Manual xLogic Micro PLC Block number Display serial number of a few functions need display et value Current value Ao param No parameter to edit press ESC Press ESC key to return 3 Select parameter you intend to modify 4 Select certain specific value of that parameter which you want to edit then press OK key How to modify para
170. h PC cable RS232 or 16 digital none 12 24V DC 10 8 V 28 8 V DC max 3 V DC 1mA min 8 V DC 1 5 mA 10 transistors NPN 0 3 A External fuse required 10Hz lt 0 1 ms function Yes typ 100 h PC cable RS232 or USB 16 digital 8 0 to 10V 12 24V DC 10 8 V 28 8 V DC max 3 V DC ImA min 8 V DC 1 5 mA 10 transistors NPN 0 3 A External fuse required 10Hz lt 0 1 ms function Yes typ 100 h PC cable RS232 or USB EASY xLogie Micro PLC User Manual WES xLogic Micro PLC Inputs of which can be used in analog mode Input supply voltage Permissible range with signal 0 with signal 1 Input current Outputs Continuous current Short circuit protection Switching frequency Cycle time Integrated time switches power reserve Connection cables Ambient temperature Storage temperature Degree of protection Certification Mounting Dimensions Programming cable xLogic lt gt xLogic ci 14 digital 14 digital 14 digital 14 digital none none 8 0 to 10V none 110 240V AC 12 24V DC 12 24V DC 12 24V DC 85 265 V AC 10 8 V 10 8 V 28 8 V 10 8 V 28 8 V 100 253 V 28 8 V DC DC DC DC max 3 V max 3 V DC max 3 V DC max 40 V AC DC imA mA imA 0 03 mA min 8 V min 8 V DC 1 5 min 8 V DELS min 79 V AC DC 1 5 mA mA mA 0 0
171. he corresponding Q2 in salves is ON IA is On in master the corresponding QA in salves is ON If I1 is OFF in master the corresponding Q1 in salves is OFF IA is OFF in master the corresponding QA in salves is OFF 285 ser Manual _ EASY xLogie Micro PLC 2 Read the Inputs I1 IA status of slave 1 to control the F11 F20 in master Read the Inputs I1 IA status of slave 2 to control the F21 F30 3 Read the AF1 value of slave1 to be saved in the AF1 of master Read AF1 value of slave2 to be saved in AF2 of master Program in slave 1 Note In the program you can put the input output block in but you cannot link the input pin of the output B003 E3 Message texts Parameter Comment Block name Character English v Priority ft Message Text I Acknowledge Message IV Show Parameters Blocks Ca AF ote Double click Parameter CA ect you can modify the decimal and length Start 1 Count 10 Program in slave 2 Note In the program you can put the input output block in but you cannot link the input pin of the output BO03 E3 Message texts Parameter Comment Block name Character English 7 Priority fi I Acknowledge Message M Show Parameters I 0 Blocks C AF ote Double click Parameter Ca ect you can modify the decimal and length Start i Count p Program in master You need use the MODBUS BLOCK to realize the
172. he swith position User Manual xLogic Micro PLC The expansion port of CPU must be open when the using extensions Following is tell you how to open the expansion port You shall first select the FUNCTION PAGE Read 5 2 1 Press F or Y key to move the cursor to Set address 2 Press OK key to confirm Set adr 3 Press F or Y key to move the cursor to Set E adr 4 Press OK key to confirm Set E adr 5 Press B or Y key to select on Notes 1 The address setup of the extension module must be before powering on Modification when powering on will be ineffective 2 Freely connection need not care the power type between CPU and extensions that means the AC type module also can be connected with the DC type module 3 Power on the CPU and the extensions on the same time in the other words the power on time of extension module do not later than the CPU s otherwise the communication between CPU and extension may not be established 59 xLogie Micro PLC 4 If the communication is established between CPU and extensions the indicator on the top of the extensions house will turn to RUN green color 3 If more than one expansion module connect to CPU at the same time the address of expansion module must be different each other otherwise the system CPU expansions would run abnormal 4 3 5 Set LCD backlight and Contrast The backlight of CPU can be set ON
173. her too hot or too cold To prevent this the person must carefully and slowly reduce or increase the heat output Loop error The loop error is the difference between the command variable and the process value In other words viation of a process value from a set value EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC ih The loop error e brings about a change to the manipulated variable M he example above illustrates this very well if with a desired temperature of 20 C command value w the room temperature is 22 C process value PV this results in the loop error e SP PV 20 C 22 C 2 C In this case the negative sign indicates a reversing action the heat output is reduced In a control loop s state of equilibrium the loop error is zero or very small If the command variable changes or there is a disturbance a loop error arises The loop error is corrected by means of the manipulated variable M Controller basics A controller can be simply portrayed as follows controller control control function process The comparing element and the controller function describe the conduct of the controller The following describes the most important types of controller A controller s step response tells us a lot about its conduct The step response describes how a controller reacts to the erratic change in the process value There are 3 important basic types of controller Proportional action controller
174. hich are set to ON The values of this parameter are fixed at 2 3 or 4 If the value of the parameter is fixed at 2 only the OUTPUT 1 and OUTPUT 2 outputs are used and may therefore change to ON In this case if more than two inputs change to ON the OUTPUT 1 and OUTPUT 2 outputs remain at ON and the OUTPUT 3 and OUTPUT 4 outputs remain fixed at OFF If the value of the parameter is fixed at 3 only the OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2 and OUTPUT 3 outputs are used and may therefore change to ON In this case if four inputs change to ON the OUTPUT 2 OUTPUT 2 and OUTPUT 3 outputs remain at ON and OUTPUT 4 remains fixed at OFF If the value of the parameter is fixed at 4 only the OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2 OUTPUT 3 and OUTPUT 4 outputs are used and may therefore change to ON All inputs which are not connected have the value OFF When the program is initialized PILOT OUTPUT NUMBER is fixed at 1 The Parameters tab contains the default check box which re initializes PILOT OUTPUT NUMBER to 1 and defines the first output activated when the first input changes to 1 after a controller power failure Example of use Filling a tank with a group of four pumps operating in parallel The operating duration of each pump is the same EASY xLogie Micro PLC Level sensori Level sensor r Level sensor3 Level sensord g a BOO Am1 ee m Pe ae G a NIIE The number o
175. his mode provides many features for example A graphic interface for offline creation of your circuit program by means of Function Block Diagram function chart Simulation of your circuit program on the PC EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC Generating and printing of an overview chart for the circuit program Saving a backup of the circuit program on the hard drive or other media Easy configuration of blocks Transferring the circuit program from the xLogic to the PC and from the PC to xLogic Online test Display of status changes and process variables of xLogic in RUN mode Status of a digital I O shift register bits and cursor keys The values of all analog I Os The results of all blocks The current values including the times of selected blocks Change the output the input pin of the output cannot be connected status via xLogicsoft Starting and stopping circuit program execution via the PC RUN STOP The xLogic alternative As you can see xLogicsoft represents an alternative to conventional engineering methods 1 You start by developing the circuit program on your desktop 2 You simulate the circuit program on your computer and verify its functions before you actually implement it in your system 3 You can add comments to the circuit program and create hard copies 4 You save a copy of your circuit program to the file system on your PC to make it directly a
176. hly mode off Pulse Off On Time 2000 06 01 Off Time 2099 08 31 Every year on June 1 the timer output switches on and remains on until August 3i 2008 2009 2010 2011 YYYY MM DD ra ii s p amr Wa ah s r ak On 2000 06 01 m m m Lia Off 2099 08 31 3 Jun Aug Jun Aug Jun Aug Jun Aug 01 31 01 31 01 31 01 31 B6 3 DEF YYYY MM DD YYYY MM DD 2000 06 01 2099 08 31 Example 2 Yearly mode on Monthly mode off Pulse on On Time 2000 03 15 Off Time 2099 Every year on March 15 the timer switches on for one cycle EASY xLogie Micro PLC 2008 2009 2010 2011 YYYY MM DD AIia On 2000 03 15 a Off 2099 Mar Mar Ma r Mar 15 15 15 15 YYYY MM DD YYYY MM DD 2000 03 15 2099 Example 3 Yearly mode on Monthly mode off Pulse off On Time 2008 06 01 Off Time 2010 08 31 On June 1 of 2008 2009 and 2010 the timer output switches on and remains on until August 31 2008 2009 2010 2011 YYYY MM DD gt r On 2008 06 01 moo mMm mMm Q Off 2010 08 31 Jun Aug Jun Aug Jun Aug 01 31 01 31 01 31 M kig OFF YYYY MM DD 2008 06 01 2010 08 31 Example 4 Yearly mode on Monthly mode off Pulse on On Time 2008 03 15 Off Time 2010 On March 15 of 2008 2009 and 2010 the timer output switches on for one cycle 2008 2009 2010 2011 tk a aaa a v wv v YYYY MM DD
177. hours counter The hours counter in the xLogic is generally retentive However if the values of the hours counter are lost after a power failure then select the respective block in your circuit program Right mouse click on the hours counter and select Block Properties gt Parameters The option Retentivity must be activated and not changeable grayed out If the Retentivity option is not available then delete the block and insert a new special function hours counter at the same position 6 5 15 Threshold trigger Fre Par Short description The output is switched on and off depending on two configurable frequencies EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC Connection Description The function count O to 1 transitions at input Fre to 0 transitions are not counted Use e Inputs 15 16 14KHZ I7 18 60kKHz for ELC 12 CPU Inputs I9 IA 14KHZ IB IC 60kKHz for upgraded ELC 18 ELC 22 ELC 26 CPU e Any other input or circuit element for low frequencies typical 4 Hz Parameter On On threshold Range of values 0000 9999 Off Off threshold Range of values 0000 9999 G_T Time interval or gate time during which the input pulses are measured Range of values 00 05 s 99 99 s Outpute lo is set or reset according to the threshold values Parameter The gate time G_T can be provided by the actual value of another already programmed function Analog comparator Ax Ay Analog trigger Ax Analog ampli
178. ifficult or impossible to access The wiring is the same for both systems Lighting Gus Guni Switch cabinet Power can be distributed oO o o via current pulse Button relay or automatic lighting devices xLogicSoft solution The xLogic system can replace the automatic stairway light switch or the pulse relay xLogic also lets you create a simple automatic stairway light switch via the stairway light switch SFB You can also implement both functions off delay timer and pulse relay in a single unit What is more you can incorporate extra functions without making any alterations to the wiring In our example program we have combined the advantages of both the current impulse relay and the automatic stairway lighting timer as follows e Actuate the pushbutton The light is switched on and switched off again on expiration of a predefined time e Hold the pushbutton down 7 Switches on continuous lighting e Press the pushbutton once more gt Switches off the lighting EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC 48 1 2 The scheme of xLogic Lighting The wiring of a lighting system with xLogic is the same as standard corridor or stairway lighting systems Only the automatic lighting timer pulse relay is replaced xLogic lets you quickly and easily combine all those functions in a single dual function switch SFB without additional wiring and expenditure Apply pulse relay of xLogic switch 11 x r 1 os
179. ig 7 10 1 Place block 6 9 2 2 Edit Property of Function Block After put all function block in edit box it s necessary to setup property of every function block This is the most important step to write function block Program Operation Method 1 In the function block Program interface click some block twice with left button of the mouse or pitch on a block and press right button of the mouse then an edit menu appears and then click Properties of this menu As shown in Fig 11 6 EASY xLogie Micro PLC A Cut Ctrltk Copy Ctrl C Delete Del Select All CtrltaA MsgI pe Fig 7 10 2 Block edit menu 2 Property dialogue box as shown in Fig 7 10 3 to setup each item of content according to what you need you also could click Help to observe the detail instruction EszI01 Sms Nessage Input ams In Block name Message W Incoming Message Default values are OW inst ti instruction 1 1 a Ta Default OFF instruction 40 OFF 140 Off Delay Enable Delay 4 seconds Call Incoming Call E Telephone 1 Incoming call 2 Incoming call 3 Incoming call 4 Incoming call 5 Incoming call Fig 7 10 3 property box Note Different block has different property setup especially the property of special function module Please read chapter 6 the explanation to refer the detailed setup 6 9 2 3 Setup link After put all the blocks needed in protracting function graph and set up
180. ing data AI AQ to an Excel file Example program 1 Select Tools gt Set Monit Config and further click it Tools SMS View Help Conti guration Disconnect Line Transfer b Simulation Fa Select Hardware Edit Cover HMI Language Selection User Manager Set Monit Contig ser Manu EASY ri d l ee A xLogie Micro PLC As below configuration shows all history data of AI AQ under monitor mode can be automatically saved to one EXCEL file for user s reference Konit Config Eonit Config superrsory ype Superrsonr Type M Inputiihitput M W Analog Input Output Registers W InputfOhitput TM we Analog Input tput Regist E D Cancel i V Save Analog Inputiutput Data IW Save Analog Input Output Data Bi Bist A Clear Previous Data Caution If the clear previous data is selected as well then the history data cannot be saved and then only the current monitor data can be saved furthermore the history data previous monitor data would be simultaneously cleared 2 Click here to enter Monitor Mode Check here to enter Wlomtor Mode S Ao S fa Et amp olol 3 View the data by clicking View gt Monit data EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC Set Hodbus Config i 900 900 800 800 700 700 600 600 500 500 400 400 300 300 200 200 100 100 0 25 0 2 10 0 2 15 0 2 20 0 2 25 0 2 30 Cursor time 0 2 32 Total lapse time 0 2 33
181. is input is not activated VALIDATION is implicitly active if it is not connected Air temperature in C 100 32768 C to 32767 C Sets the defrost output to ON if the temperature is less than the maximum temperature Sets the defrost output to OFF Priority stop The defrost output is at ON when the CUMULATIVE OPERATING TIME has elapsed the alarm is optional where it is validated parameters the user has the choice between an absolute alarm i e independent of any change to the preset value anc a relative alarm which is dependent on the preset value Absolute Alarm the user configures a value When the value measured exceeds this value the ALARM output switches to logic state 1 Relative Alarm the user configures a difference When the value measured is Measured duration in minutes when the temperature is less than the minimum temperature or duration of the current defrost cycle Parameters CUMULATIVE OPERATING TIME Time T in minutes at the end of which the function triggers defrosting 1 to 32767 DEFROST CYCLE Duration of defrosting in minutes 1 to 32767 MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE Temperature in C above which defrosting is stopped 10 C 20 C MINIMUM TEMPERATURE Temperature in C below which the time T is measured 10 C 0 C User Manual EASY xLogie Micro PLC MAXIMUM 448 C TEMPERATURE MINIMUM mrs y E TEMPERATURE DEFROST T t1 t2 t3
182. is only to explain the general rule of using xLogic It is possible that these instances can be different from user s specific application so user should take all related responsibility of running those instance systems and we sincerely suggest user shall refer to relevant nation standard and installation rules related to systems Also we have to point out that error is unavoidable and we reserve the according modification rights 8 1 Dual function switch Requirements for stairway lighting systems The basic requirements for a stairway lighting system are as follows When someone is using the stairs the stairway lights should be on If no one is in the stairway the lights should go out in order to save energy 8 1 1 Standard solution Up to now two methods were known to control such a lighting system Pulse relay When the lights are off press any of the pushbuttons to switch on the lights When the lights are on press any of the pushbuttons to switch off the lights again Disadvantage People often forget to switch off the lights 293 xLogie Micro PLC Automatic stairway light switch Press any one of the pushbuttons to switch on the lights The lights if switch off again automatically when a preset off delay time has expired Disadvantage You can t keep the lights switched on over an extended period of time The permanent on switch usually installed inside the stairway lighting timer unit may be d
183. is set to logical EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC f upon expiration of this time output is on delayed to the input signal ma The time Tu is reset if the status at input Trg is reset to 0 before this time has expired he time T is triggered with the 1 to O transition at the output If the status at input Trg remains O at least for the duration of a configured time T the output is reset to 0 upon expiration of this time output is off delayed to the input signal The time T is reset if the status at input Trg is returns to 1 before this time has expired 6 5 4 Retentive on delay Trg F Par Short description A one shot at the input triggers a configurable time The output is set upon expiration of this time Input Trg Trigger the on delay time via the Trg Trigger input Reset the time on delay time and reset the output to O via input R Reset Reset takes priority over Trg Parameter T is the on delay time for the output output signal transition Oto 1 Retentivity on the status is retentive in memory Output Q Q is switched on upon expiration of the time T Parameter The time in parameter T can be provided by the value of another already programmed function Analog comparator Ax Ay Analog trigger Ax Analog amplifier Ax Analog multiplexer AQ Analog ramp AQ Analog math AQ PI controller AQ Data latching relay AQ Up Down counter Cnt ar Manual EASY xLogie Mi
184. isconnect Success The items with red circle marked must be the same as the above figure Slave 1 settings IP address is 192 168 0 17 EASY xLogie Micro PLC Hetwork IP Conf1 gaur ation Server eos a M Channel 192 168 0 17 Hostlistl BOOTF Enable IP Address i ss Serial Setting DHCP Enable ee 755 255 255 0 x Commectiont Auto IF Enable Password Setting Gateway 132 165 0 1 f Apply Settings Resta DHCF Host Hame Ea Log Out Preferred INS Server Bac Address 192 166 0 1 Work as Client Remote Host 192 168 0 16 Remote port 5001 Basic Setting F Network Het Protocol tcp Server ee Channel i F Hostlisti Remote Host 19 166 0 16 gt Start Character Ox oo wf Serial petting Remate Port cool 4 IHS Query Feriod 1500 s Password Setting Local Fort ggg a Flush Input Buffer 7 Apply Settings Resta jii ae j JL at With Active Connect Yes ag Ou Connect Response fHith Fassive Connect Tes WseHostlist Yes At Timeof Disconnect Yes On DSK Irop Tes Flush Output Buffer The items with red circle marked must be the same as the above figure PLC address need be changed to 1 default is 1 Change the CPU address with the panel key Prese ana then press Press ASL i Eu Press pen Press ASLS wil Change address with UP or DOWN button and confirm with OK Slave 2 settings IP address is 192 168 0 18 EASY User Manual
185. ith a signal at the Trg input You set the current time Ta and reset the output to 0 with a signal at input R Parameter T The output is reset 1 to O transition when the time T has expired T determines the period during which the input must be set in order to enable the permanent light function T Determines the on delay for the pre warning time Tit determines the length of the pre warning time Retentivity set on the status is retentive in memory Output Q Output Q is set with a signal at input Trg and it is reset again after a configured time has expired and depending on the pulse width at input Trg or it is reset with another signal at input Trg Parameter The off delay time T the permanent light time TL the on delay pre warning time T and the pre warning time period T L can be provided by the actual value of another already programmed function EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC nalog comparator Ax Ay Mi Analog trigger Ax Analog amplifier Ax Analog multiplexer AQ Analog ramp AQ Analog math AQ PI controller AQ Data latching relay AQ Up Down counter Cnt The value of T TL can be set modified in parameter mode For information about how to modify refer to chapter 5 2 2 please Timing diagram Description of the function Output Q is set to 1 with a O to 1 signal transition at Trg If output Q O and input Trg is set hi at least for the duration of TL the pe
186. l EASY xLogic Micro PLC ftrigger atinput tr O Parameter The time set in parameter T can be supplied by the value of another already programmed function Analog comparator Ax Ay Analog trigger Ax Analog amplifier Ax Analog multiplexer AQ Analog ramp AQ Analog math AQ PI controller AQ Data latching relay AQ Up Down counter Cnt The value of T can be set modified in parameter mode For information about how to modify refer to chapter 5 2 2 please Select the required function by the block number The time base is configurable For information on valid time base ranges and parameter preset refer to chapter 4 4 1 the On delay topic Timing diagram Ty JMOL es Ta fol MiGol mn Description of the function Output Q is set to 1 momentarily with a O to 1 transition at input Trg At the 1 to 0 transition at input Trg xLogic retriggers the current time T and the output remains set The output Q is reset to 0 when Ta reaches the value specified in T Ta T off delay A one shot at input Trg retriggers the time Ta You can reset the time Ta and the output via the input R Reset before the time Ta has expired If retentivity is not set output Q and the expired time are reset after a power failure 6 5 3 On Off delay Short description The on off delay function is used to set an output after a configured on delay time and then reset it again upon expiration of a second configured ti
187. le The programming software xLogicSoft contains extensive online help A small example in the first part of this chapter introduces the operating principles of xLogic e You will learn the meaning of two basic terms namely the connector and the block e As the next step you will create a circuit program based on a simple conventional circuit e Lastly you will enter this program directly in xLogic It will take you only a few pages of this manual to store your first executable circuit program in the xLogic unit With suitable hardware switches etc you will then be able to carry out initial tests 5 1 Connectors xLogic is equipped with inputs and outputs Example of a configuration with several modules Inputs digital Inputs digital 0 10 DC analog a pases 209000 codai CO B E a aa O RunstoP O RUN STOP O RUN STOP ELC12 E 8DC DA R ELC12 E 8DC DA TNipnp OPU ox a ine AET C350 Ov ELC12 E PT100 OUTPUT 4X Transistor D 3A OOO O et OO OO OO OG orooro OGOOGO 0 0 e 6 a z c5 c5 Outputs Analog inputs PT100 Each input is identified by the letter I plus a number When you look at xLogic from the front you can see the input terminals at the top Only analog modules PT100 and 0 20mA input have the inputs at the EASY xLogie Micro PLC Each output is identified by the letter Q plus a number ELC E AQ AQ plus number In the figure you if x can see the output terminals
188. le escia e E TE E ee nnn ER 60 A300 SEL COMMU NICAL ON paramnele Sersaeriaeat a a i 61 4 3 7 Modification of System BVT MVS tesa cere are a ERa EAE A EE 63 Chapter S Prooramming Via panel KEyesrseceininasiin t na A aa 64 EF UCU Or aE E E E E E A S 65 BAEk and OCE mD E a e a E EEN ETO ee A ee 67 5 3 From cirouit diagrami to KEOGIC Drogr aiseria EE E EEEE 69 5 4 The four golden rules TOF operating xLOgiCcersinrararsreta an i A 70 S5 Witng and starting the circuit Droga ieissar a S E 71 B5 koeling 610 es a aye al a o ModE seere a er nnn nee Te eee ere eee ene ee ere 72 Eaa TTE il eclaeell cele leg elaorel esis peremeerem erento ren merry E eae eee reer eenn err ser eee meee eee N 73 sMo CESS U aeea E tre mer mere eer rrr errr Tene renner Tree eer mene er emer trent eee or 74 515 4 ASSIGHING a creuit programi MAM Cssisstcsvencces sss vsncisscaseinedtonsviisntavsceiastenceaandsevaccuadedensilacsionssnnavaytunssnsveassientaseseties 77 5 5 5 Assigning system cover EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC sA Acke cap okalge iige gs SE iana eN Cerne airmen etn nnn nvr eer mente mn A etek ene E een ry eer a 79 Smo eae BY E 119 re M8 011 N A en Cer veneer ern E orn hr re E or etme ern erent cerca ner mT eter 85 5 6 Memory SPACE ANA circuit program SiZC sisscceseccsccsntoressossesesssersecvsoseseonesnanrvessueoovsisnessssssservnchadeassossansorsaasrsassusenenseness 86 Chapter 6 Configuring amp Programming SOW al Esseen E 86 opel imp Ke al ede
189. le your Ethernet module to link to Ethernet you are required to connect the LAN port of the CPU to your computer by net router You are allowed to connect the LAN port of the CPU to Ethernet directly by common net cable Hereunder let s take computer as an example Connect diagram You are required to set as following way otherwise the Ethernet module may fail to work please take some time to study the below instruction carefully Power on ELC 22DC DA R N module and click Ak to search Ethernet module At the same time the searching aa Ver Manual EASY xLogie Micro PLC Process will be showing In the search window we can see the search module and the corresponding MAC address and IP Address Devicelanager 2 00 Operate Tools Language Help q Jum Den ao Devi ceHame IF Address Physical Address SK m L 192 1635 0 250 00 0 08 05 5a 56 Si WE L 193z 1685 0 16 00 Da 05 T3 dT Mk Double click the device in the list of equipment or select equipment items click the toolbar button Login on 192 168 0 16 admin Username Password PEPEE Parm Input the username and password to login The default is Username admin Password is admin If the username and the password are both correct you can click the Legin button And the configuration dialog box would pop out EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC pe wore Device Hame HB L Server H Chann
190. log are up to 64 can be used when programming In your block configuration you can assign a new number to the flag provided this flag number does not already exist in your circuit program The output always carries the signal of the previous program cycle This value does not change if the communication has failed Startup flag F8 The F8 flag is set in the first cycle of the user program and can thus be used in your circuit program as a startup flag It is reset after the first program execution cycle In the subsequent cycles the F8 flag reacts in the same way as the F1 to F64 flags Backlight flags F64 The F64 flag controls the backlight of the xLogic onboard display You can use the outputs of timers message texts or other function blocks to activate the backlight flags To enable multiple conditions to control the backlight of the devices you can use multiple function blocks in parallel or in sequence Notes 1 The address of F can be found in the modbus communication protocol file the F block figure must have the input pin in the xLogic showing 1 Keep the input pin of F NULL do not connect with other blocks if you want to use the write property Input pin a User Manual EASY xLogie Micro PLC 6 2 9 AF Analog flag Flags are used when xLogic works in a communication system AF is analog flag which is used to save transfer analog values data format is Signed short between the master and slave d
191. log value to the output AQ 0 on input EN switches 0 to the output AQ Inputs S1 S1 and S2 selectors for and S2 selecting the analog value to be issued S1 0 and S2 0 The value 1 is issued S1 0 and S2 1 The value 2 is issued S1 1 and S2 0 The value 3 is issued Si 1 and S2 1 The value 4 is issued EASY xLogie Micro PLC Parameter V1 V4 Analog values Value that will be issued Value range 32768 32767 p Number of decimal places value range O 1 2 3 Output AQ Analog output Value range for AQ 32768 32767 Parameters V1 V4 The values for V1 V4 can be provided by the value of another already programmed function Analog comparator Ax Ay Analog trigger Ax Analog amplifier Ax Analog multiplexer AQ Analog ramp AQ Analog math AQ PI controller AQ Data latching relay AQ Up Down counter Cnt Timing Diagram Description of Function If input En is set then the function issues one of 4 possible analog values V1 to V4 at the output AQ depending on the parameters S1 and S2 EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC the input En is not set then the function issues the analog value O at output AQ Analog output If you interconnect this special function with a real analog output note that the analog output can only process values between 0 and 1000 To do this you may need to connect an additional amplifier between the analog output of the
192. lowing File Edit Tools SMS Library View Help EASY B g Workspace a r a Simulation F3 Disconnect Line E Select Hardware Edit Cover HMI Language Selection User Manager Set Monit Config File optimization FL Multiple function Weekly Timer MO Yearly Timer Counter y Up Down counter fE Hours Counter Threshold trigger a Analog Analog comparator Mery reas s QQ zs PC gt PLC PLO gt PC Password set Get PLO Version Get SMS Version Set Clock Get Clock Get Communication Type Set Communication Type Set PLO s Address Get PLO s Address Get PLO s Scan Time Summer time Winter time Set Extended module User Manual xLogic Micro PLC Fig 10 3 Tools Menu lt Configuration Select and open the Com port n e X Disconnect Line Cancel the connection of PC and xLogic X Transfer Transfer the following data between PC and xLogic PC gt PLC Download the program to xLogic PLC gt PC Upload the program from xLogic Password set Set Password protection to xLogic Get PLC Version Get the current xLogic hardware version Set Clock Set RTC for xLogic Get Clock Get RTC from xLogic Get Communication Type Get current communication type Set Communication Type Set communication type for current xLogic Set PLC s address Set the current xLogic address Get PLC s address Get the address of current xLogic Get PLC s scan time Get the s
193. math function rounds the result to the nearest integer value The number of operand values is fixed at four and the number of operators is fixed at 3 If you need to EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC Hse fewer operands use constructions such as 0 or 1 to fill the remaining parameters You can also configure the behavior of the function when the Enable parameter En 0 The function block can either retain its last value or be set to 0 Possible errors Zero division and overflow If the analog math function block execution results in zero division or overflow it sets internal bits that indicate the type of error that occurred You can program an analog math error detection function block in your circuit program to detect these errors and to control the program behavior as needed You program one analog math error detection function block to reference one specific analog math function block Examples The following tables show some simple example analog math block parameters and the resulting equations and output values 2o fot m hB d e GB Equation 12 6 3 1 Result 13 Equation 2 3 1 4 Result 17 Equation 100 25 2 1 Result 25 6 5 31 Analog math error detection Short Description The analog math error detection block sets an output if an error has occurred in the referenced analog math function block connection osmon OSS User Manual EASY xLogie
194. me connection Description ar Manual EASY xLogie Micro PLC You trigger the on delay with a positive edge 0 to 1 ey ad transition at input Trg Trigger You trigger the off delay with a negative edge 1 to 0 transition Parameter Tu is the on delay time for the output output signal transition 0 to 1 Ti is the off delay time for the output output signal transition 1 to 0 Retentivity on the status is retentive in memory Q is switched on upon expiration of a configured time Tu if Trg is still set It is switched off again upon expiration of the time TL and if Trg has not been set again Parameter The on delay time and off delay time set in parameter TH and TL can be provided by the actual value of another already programmed function Analog comparator Ax Ay Analog trigger Ax Analog amplifier Ax Analog multiplexer AQ Analog ramp AQ Analog math AQ PI controller AQ Data latching relay AQ Up Down counter Cnt The value of TH TL can be set modified in parameter mode For information about how to modify refer to chapter 7 2 2 please For information on the validity and accuracy of the time base refer to 7 4 2 Timing diagram wr G I I 1i M LUW i iig A e o ti 8 e Tm a e lL Description of the function The time Tu is triggered with a O to 1 transition at input Trg If the status at input Trg is 1 at least for the duration of the configured time Ty the output
195. me by means of this time the influence of the integral part is controlled on the manipulated variable also known as the integral action time xLogie Micro PLC Loop error at the time n C A The following picture shows a jump in process value and step response of the controller Pi Summary The PI controller has the following characteristics The P controller components quickly intercept an occurring loop error The I controller components can then remedy the remaining loop error The controller components supplement each other so that the PI controller works quickly and precisely Description of the individual parameters Controller parameters Portrayed in xLogic Possible value range in the xLogic Mn Manipulated variable Output of the PI controller block O to 1 000 at the time n kP In the xLogic the parameter KC 0 00 to 99 99 applies as an increase for the I part Gain of the P part and the P part of the controller equally Should you enter KC 0 then the P KI part of the controller switches off In this special case k is automatically set to 1 for the I part If KC 0 kP OandkI 1 Gain of the I part If KC lt gt 0 kP kI KC Ts Sampling time 500 ms duration of a time slice TI Integral time Parameter TI if you set this 00 01 min to 99 59 min parameter to 99 59 min then you switch off the I part of the controller EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC Refer to SP and PV
196. mentary switches switches light barriers daylight control switches etc EASY xLogie Micro PLC Signal status 0O senor lt 0 24mMA P nA Pe gt 85VAC gt 8VDC Signal status 1 Typical ypical 3mA Analogue input wo I1 AI4 0 10V DC Note 1 For ELC 18DC DA ELC 22DC DA ELC 26DC DA Series ELC 12DC DA Series and SSR 12DC DA versions That can receive analog input They can be set to analog input or digital input as either may be used in the program They will be recognized as analog inputs when the input terminal is connected with an analog function block and they will be recognized as switching inputs when the input terminal is not connected with an analog function block The analog inputs require DC OV 10V voltage signals These are divided equally in 0 02V increments In programming all the block parameters related to the analog inputs are based on the minimum increment of 0 02V 3 They can be recognized as switching input when the input voltage is more than 10 0V and cannot be recognized as an analog input 4 For the switching input off when the switch status changes from 0 to 1 the time of Status 1 must be greater than 50ms and when the switch status changes from 1 to O the time of Status 0 also must be greater than 50ms Connecting xLogic is shown as in the following figures DC type inputs L User Manual xLogic Micro PLC AC type inputs AC 110 240V
197. meter A First select certain parameter which you need to edit by following the below procedures 1 Under the FUNCTION PAGE select Set parameter Press A or Y key Runs top SpaAt Param Set Clock 2 Confirm by pressing OK key B then you can perform the below actions to modify parameter 1 Move the cursor to the parameter to be modified press a or gt key 2 Modify value press A or Y key 3 Confirm the value after modification press OK key 7 x B9 Modify press or Y key BOS 2005 Move press 4 or P key Ta 06 00s Finished setting press OK key Note EASY xLogie Micro PLC When xLogic is running not only time value but also time unit S M H can be altered but Besides alter time parameter at RUN time you can alter time base s second m minute h hour Current value of time T View time T in parameter mode B9 T 80 00s Configuration time T Ta 06 008 Currenttime You are allowed to modify configuration time Switch on off time for a time segment In parameter mode time segment figure of a timer B1 1 D M W F On 09 00 You can alter the time and date of switch on off Current value of counter In parameter mode the parameter view of a counter B3 On 001234 OfE 000000 Cnt 000120 Current count value Current value of hour counter In parameter mode the view of hour counters EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC
198. more than one main module is needed and these main EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC amp modules have to communicate each main module will be connected over an Ethernet Module box to the thernet The project down and upload to and from the main modules and the communication between the main modules happens over the Ethernet network Furthermore the visualization of the whole system is possible and easy to realize a personal computer Ethernet Note xLogic CPU may be equipped with expansion modules of the different voltage class but expansion module must be supplied the correct power corresponding to its type Each xLogic CPU provides the following connections for the creation of the circuit program regardless of the number of connected blocks Digital inputs I1 to I4 ELC 6 I1 to I8 ELC 12 I1 to IC ELC 18 11 to ID ELC 22 I1 to IF ELC 26 Analog inputs AI1 to AI8 Digital outputs Q1 to Q6 ELC 18 Q1 to Q4 ELC 12 Digital flag blocks F1 F64 applied to standard ELC 12 amp Upgraded ELC 18 CPU F1i F64 F8 Startup flag F64 Backlight control bit Analog flag blocks AF1 to AF64 applied to standard ELC 12 amp Upgraded ELC 18 CPU AF1 AF32 applied to other ELC series CPU Shift register bits S1 to S8 4 cursor keys and 8 Panel keys ELC 22 26 ELC 12AC R N EASY xLogie Micro PLC Chapter 2 Hardware models and resources 2 1 Naming Rules of ELC amp SSR Series
199. n add parameter data as required Particular characteristics to be noted when configuring The message text can be configured in the block properties dialog You can enter up to 4 lines for each mae User Manual EASY xLogie Micro PLC message text the text display of the xLogic has 4 x 16 characters and set the priority You can move to the next line using the cursor keys or the mouse Hit the ENTER key to confirm all your entries in the block properties dialog and to close the dialog You may also enter the actual values of other blocks in the text lines To do so select the relevant block from the Block dialog A Parameter dialog opens to display a list of all parameters available for the selected block The block parameter you select in this dialog is written to the selected text line The actual parameter value is now included when you call the message text Set the Acknowledge message attribute to specify whether a message is be acknowledged before it is closed A I O status of CPU and extensions BOOS E5 Hessage texts Parameter Comment Block name Message Text Sie Decimals Friority l2 a z Acknowledge Message i I 0 C Blocks ae eo Ce lo J CF C AF om C aM Block Parameter Input oC Output time Current date Bessage enable time enable date a aa B Blocks Black name Message Text g c Friority i 7 Acknowledge Message C
200. n be supplied by xLogic is 10A for the resistance load and 2A for the inductive load The connection is in accordance with the following figure EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC Relay Output 2 Requirement for the electronic transistor output The load connected to xLogic must have the following characteristics The maximum switch current cannot exceed 0 3A When the switch is ON Q 1 the maximum current is 0 3A 2d 28 GO Qi M Transistor Output PNP Notes PNP The load connecting voltage must be lt 60VDC and it must be DC The terminal of the output wiring must be connected with the DC positive voltage and it must be connected with the L terminal of the xLogic power a load must be connected with the terminal of the DC negative voltage EASY xLogie Micro PLC Transistor Output NPN Notes NPN The load connecting voltage must be lt 80VDC and it must be DC The terminal of the output wiring must be connected with the DC negative voltage and it must be connected with the M terminal of the xLogic power a load must be connected with the terminal of the DC positive voltage ELC E AQ V 00000000000 m m cL min na 1 ee tt tga hha Supka LEEY i WLY2 0 10V DC SUT PIT Eon El gt 5 kD or 0 10 De Rl Rl ELC12 E AQ ELC E AQ I EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC g RuN st
201. n controlling a quantity is manipulated without being able to compensate for outside influences When regulating a quantity is maintained at a specific value in order to compensate for outside influences In the following example controlling means that the person can set the heat output at a fixed value The heater cannot compensate for the drop in room temperature when a window is opened In the example below regulating means that the person can increase the heat output if the room temperature drops to below 20 C If the room temperature rises above 20 C the heat output is reduced Basic concepts of regulating In the example the current for the electric heating is the manipulated variable The changeable resistance is the actuator The hand that operates the actuator is the control The actual room temperature is the controlled variable or the process value The desired room temperature is the command variable or the setpoint value The electric heating is the control process The thermometer is the sensor The temperature loss from opening the window is the disturbance variable So this means that the person measures the process value room temperature with the sensor thermometer compares the process value room temperature with the command variable desired room temperature and uses the actuator changeable resistance to manually regulate the manipulated variable heating current in order to compensate for the disturbance vari
202. n menu is shown as the following gister bit 150 200 Fig 10 5 View Menu X Status bar state bar displaying instruction X Workspace workspace displaying instruction X Info Window Info window displaying instruction X Zoom window proportion displaying instruction There are four different sizes of the windows for the user to select 6 8 1 6 Help Ci zLogic Soft ELogicl File Edit Tools SMS View nI z E il i Contents Workspace About xLogic Soft Version information X Content Index Help index and detailed contents X About xLogicsoft X Version information EASY xLogie Micro PLC 6 8 2 Toolbar The icons of the standard toolbar provide quick access to commands that are also available on the menu Standard oh EEEo c Page Layout Tab Toolbar Open COM port Download PC gt xLogic On line monitor Upload xLogic gt PC Get RTC from xLogic Set RTC to xLogic 6 8 3 Programming Toolbar The programming toolbar contains integral icons for creating editing and testing programs Each one of these tools represents a programming mode in which mouse operations have different effects The editing tools are not available as menu commands Catalog of the elements of a circuit program open close Selection Tool EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC Connector Tool Constants and Terminals Basic functions Special functions a _ Selection Tool
203. n there is a low to high trigger at Trg pin the Memory Read block will be activated and xLogic CPU will read some data bit or short to set pre configured register from the file in the SD card of ELC MEMORY module Each trigger only write once Reset the Memory Read block and set the output to O via the R Reset input Reset has priority over Trg Output Q Q switches on only after the Read function had been executed correctly provided Description of Memory write block s property dialog box B001 H1 Hemory Read Farameter Comment Block name File Params 1 File Name OUTPUT tet 2 Record Title Q1 Q11 3 Data Type BIT 4 Record Index to 5 Register Params Register Address Count 1 File name The name of the file which you want to access is stored in the mini SD card of the ELC MEMORY module file in SD card of ELC FIERMORY Ta TETH a 2 Record Title Below is an example in the OUTPUT TXT 2011 81 38 13 52 25 Q1 011 11110000100000AAANNG 2611 61 36 1392522317 01 011 111108001 B86608008006 2611 81 38 13252237 01 011 1111 080010060000006 3 Data Type Two options available Option A BIT 0 or 1 this is used to be set the status of Q or F Option B WORD this is used to be set the value of AQ or AF 4 Record Index Here is used to set which line the CPU will access via this Memory Read block User Manual EASY xLogie Mi
204. n to the nearest 0 0001 by rounding up or down as appropriate ar Manual EASY xLogie Micro PLC B001 Boo AM2 1 638 638 00 Sin 63 8 0 8973 and Cos 63 8 0 4415 6 6 xLogicsoft xLogicSoft xLogicsoft runs under Windows 95 98 Windows NT 4 0 Windows Me Windows 200089 Windows XP windows Vista xLogicsoft is capable of client server operation and offers you a high degree of freedom for creating your circuit program xLogicSoft xLogicV3 0 0 7 This is the current version of xLogicsoft You will find all the functions and the functionality of the devices described in this manual in the version 3 0 0 7 and later Note If a full version is not installed you can carry out an upgrade as follows Install the software from the CD When the system prompts you for the previous version place the old xLogicsoft CD in CD drive Point your browser to the Install directory on the CD Updates and info You can download demo versions of the software free of charge from the Internet address specified in the preface Installing xLogicsoft 1 Double click on Setup exe or left click the INSTALL menu directly 2 Select the language you would like and click OK to confirm EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC Select Setup Language i xj Select the language to use during the installation 3 If you consent to the license agreement click Next to confirm El Set
205. nction block is used to reset the device Ethernet modem or WIFI modem built in in the CPU if there is a trigger at the Trg pin It merely can be applied to the CPU with Ethernet module or Wifi module built in Available in below CPUs ELC series type ELC 12DC DA R N 217 xLogie Miero PLC ELC 12AC R N _ ELC 22DC DA R N Ed Dy ELC 22AC R N emen per If there is a trigger at the Trg pin then the Ethernet modem will be reset The modem will be startup again until the time Reset period reached Parameter Channel Ethernet Reset period 1 100s When the Ethernet module had been reset successfully this block will output a short trigger Description of the function In order to monitor the communication status of the Ethernet to see if it is normal or continuous or avoid the Ethernet module is dead by unknown cause sometimes we need reset the Ethernet module built in in the CPU when the communication has failed or been timeout Just one parameter to be set is the Reset period as follows Here are two examples with detailed description on how to use these blocks in the program Example 1 Just as below program shows after the CPU running we can push down the digital inputi just need a short trigger to reset the Ethernet modem after the Reset period here is 5s is reached the Ethernet modem will start up and this block will output a short trigger at the same time Example2 We also can use su
206. ndard upgraded ELC 18 Series Expansion Modules ELC E 16AC R AC110 8 digital 4 relays 10A 4 relays 3A AC240V ELC E 16DC D R DC12 24V 8digital 4 relays 10A 4 relays 3A ELC E 16DC DA R DC12 24V 6digital 2analog digital 4 relays 10A 4 relays 3A ELC E 16DC D TN DC12 24V 8digital 8 transistors PNP 0 3A ELC E 16DC DA TN DC12 24V 6digital 2analog digital 8 transistors PNP 0 3A ELC E PT100 DC12 24V 3 Channels PT100 resolution 0 1 12bits temperature range 50 C none 200 C User Manual REx xLogic Micro PLC ELC RS485 ELC RS232 ELC USB ELC Ethernet DC AC ELC SMS D R ELC COPIER ELC 22AC R CAP Discontinued ELC 22DC D R CAP Discontinued ELC 22DC DA R CAP Discontinued ELC 22DC DA TN CAP Discontinued ELC 22DC DA TP CAP Discontinued ELC 22AC R HMI YES ELC 22DC D R HMI ELC 22DC DA R HMI Discontinued ELC 22DC DA R N HMI built in Ethernet port ELC 22DC DA TN HMI Discontinued ELC 22DC DA TP HMI YES Brief Description CPU with 23 LED indicators COVER CPU with 23 LED indicators COVER CPU with 23 LED indicators COVER CPU with 23 LED indicators COVER CPU with 23 LED indicators COVER CPU with keypad panel LCD CPU with keypad panel LCD CPU with keypad panel LCD CPU with keypad panel LCD CPU with keypad panel LCD CPU with keypad U
207. ng through the circuit starting at the output and ending at the input Step 1 The make contact S3 is interconnected in series to output Q1 and to a further circuit element A series connection corresponds with the AND block Step 2 S1 and S2 are connected in parallel A parallel circuit corresponds with the OR block User Manual EASY xLogie Micro PLC Unused inputs Keep NULL connection for the unused connectors In our example we shall use only two inputs of the OR block and two inputs of the AND block the relevant unused first and fourth inputs have no connection Wiring Connect the switches S1 to S3 to the screw terminals of your xLogic e S1 to connector I1 of xLogic e S2 to connector I2 of xLogic e S3 to connector I3 of xLogic The output of the AND block controls the relay at output Q1 The load E1 is connected to output Q1 Wiring example The following figure shows you the wiring based on a 220 V AC version of xLogic Li T yaa Input wiring 2 2 QP 1 Gi oe li Output wiring inad T 5 4 The four golden rules for operating xLogic Rule 1 Changing the operating mode EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC You create the circuit program in programming mode After power is on and when the display shows No Program press the ESC key to select programming mode e Timer and parameter values of an existing circuit program can be edited both in par
208. nication status of the below accessories ELC RS232 cable ELC USB cable PRO RS485 cable ELC MEMORY ELC Copier RS485 This channel is the RS485 port it can be used to monitor or display the communication status of the below accessories For Standard ELC 12 Series ELC12 E RS485 For ELC 12DC DA R N HMI CPU EXM E RS485 For ELC 18 22 26 Series CPUs ELC RS485 Ethernet This channel is the Ethernet port it can be used to monitor or display the communication status of the LAN port built in in the CPU Timeout 1 100s Monitor type Tx Data from CPU to external devices Rx Data from external device to CPU Tx Rx Data transmission between external device and CPU Description of the function EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC order to monitor the communication status of the RS232 RS485 and Ethernet port we can enable such function block when the timeout period exceeds such block shall output a high level trigger How to insert the com port status to the text message for displaying Put the com port status into program Select BLOCKS in the text message property block io o lee 4a PF Ete E lt ae E ae ofl QI BOO2 H2 Message texts Parameter Comment Block name Chaite english o Priority fi Message Text G I Acknowledge Message V Show Parameters r o Block C ar Ca r IF O AF CM C aM me ar amerer Start BOO3 Comport status Al 1
209. nput the program sets a logical 1 The GF list contains the basic function blocks you can use for your circuit program The following basic functions are available AND View in the circuit diagram View in xLogicsoft Name of the basic function User Manual xLogic Micro PLC AND with edge evaluation NAND Not AND Parallel circuit with break contacts NAND with edge evaluation Parallel circuit with make contacts i NOR Series circuit with break 4 Not OR contacts A Th 9 exclusive OR Double changeover contact NOT i negation inverter Break contact BOOLEAN FUNCTION BOOLEAN FUNCTION 6 3 1 AND Circuit diagram of a series circuit with several make contacts FoI Symbol in xLogic The output of an AND function is only 1 if all inputs are 1 i e when they are closed A block input that is not used x is assigned x 1 Logic table of the AND block EASY xLogie Micro PIL 6 3 2 AND with edge evaluation LIF Symbol in xLogic The output of an AND with edge evaluation is only 1 if all inputs are 1 and at least one input was 0 during the last cycle The output is set to 1 for the duration of one cycle and must be reset to 0 for the duration of the next cycle before it can be set to 1 again A block input that is not used x is assigned x 1 Timing diagram of an AND with edge evaluation ee o E E a a bhb ddddif thu
210. nput En is set then the function sets the value StSp Offset B for 100 ms Then depending on the connection of Sel the function runs from the level StSp Offset B to either level 1 or level 2 at the acceleration set in Rate If the input St is set the function runs to a level of StSp B at the acceleration set in Rate Then the function holds the level at StSp Offset B for 100 ms After 100 ms the level is set to Offset B output AQ The scaled value output AQ is 0 If the input St is set the function can only be restarted once the inputs St and En have been reset If input Sel has been changed depending on the connection of Sel the function runs from the current target level to the new target level at the rate that is specified If the input En is reset the function immediately sets the current level to Offset B The current level is updated every 100 ms Note the relationship between output AQ and the current level Output AQ current level Offset B Gain A 6 5 30 Analog Math Short Description The analog math block calculates the value AQ of an equation formed from the user defined operands and operators connection oes SSS Input EN Enable the analog math function block User Manual EASY xLogie Micro PLC Parameter V1 Value 1 First operand i a a V2 Value 2 Second operand ay V3 Value 3 Third operand 7 V4 Value 4 Forth operand Operator 1 First operat
211. nsion module COM RS485 72 for Ethernet module or RS485 module to use Chapter 4 Parameters modification HMI operation 4 1 Overview of xLogic menu Programming mode Parameter assignment mode Parameter assignment menu EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC 4 2 LCD panel instruction 1 Display area 4x16 characters can be displayed 4x10 characters for ELC 12 and ELC 18 series CPU 2 4X Function key operate the program by pressing down these key Only for ELC 22 and ELC 26 series CPU invalid for ELC 12 and ELC 18 series CPU 3 6x Panel key you can modify the parameters programming view alarming message What this operate panel can do for you 1 Display the RUN STOP status of the CPU 2 Display or modify the Clock 3 Display the IO status of CPU amp extensions 4 Display all kinds registers value AI AO Parameters of blocks etc 5 Display multiple alarming messages 6 Modify the parameters of blocks 7 Manual programming 8 Backlight can be controlled via programming Light on Alarm 9 System cover message can be customized 1 0 Up to 64 different alarming messages is allowed 1 1 The CPU address can be modified 1 2 Set address of extension For ELC 18 ELC 22 ELC 26 series or switch on off the extension port For ELC 12 series 1 3 Set password protection Menu shows EASY xLogie Micro PLC Alarming message The contents of the text message when the input pin of text mes
212. ntil P corresponds again to SP Dir is coordinated to the basic conduct of a control loop The direction dir cannot be changed during the term of the function The change in Dir here is shown for the purposes of clarification As AQ is set to 0 by means of the input R PV changes This is based on the fact that PV increases which on account of Dir upwards causes AQ to drop Description of Function If the input A M is set to 0 then the special function issues output AQ with the value that you set with parameter Mq If the input A M is set to 1 then automatic mode commences As an integral sum the value Mq is adopted the controller function begins the calculations in accordance with the formulas given in Control and regulate basics The updated value PV is used to calculate in the formulas Updated value PV PV gain offset If the updated value PV SP then the special function does not change the value of AQ Dir upwards timing diagram numbers 1 and 3 User Manual EASY xLogie Micro PLC e If the updated value PV gt SP then the special function reduces the value of AQ Say e Ifthe updated value PV lt SP then the special function increases the value of a AQ Dir downwards timing diagram number 2 e If the updated value PV gt SP then the special function increases the value of AQ e If the updated value PV lt SP then the special function reduces the value of AQ
213. o PLC Up Down counter Cnt The value of T L can be set modified in parameter mode For information about how to modify refer to chapter 5 2 2 please Timing diagram Ta 7 l T Description of the function With the input signal Trg 1 output Q is set to 1 The signal also triggers the time Ta while the output remains set When Ta reaches the value defined at T Ta T the output Q is reset to 0 state pulse output If the signal at input Trg changes from 1 to 0 before this time has expired the output is immediately reset from 1 to O 6 5 6 Edge triggered wiping relay Trg F Par Short description An input pulse generates a preset number of output pulses with a defined pulse pause ratio retriggerable after a configured delay time has expired EASY xLogie Micro PLC You trigger the times for the Edge triggered wiping rela with a signal at input Trg Trigger The output and the current time Ta are reset to O with a signal at input R Parameter TL TH The inter pulse period T and the pulse period Tu are adjustable N determines the number of pulse pause cycles TL Tu Value range 1 9 Retentivity set on the status is retentive in memory Output Q Output Q is set when the time T has expired and is reset when Tu has expired Parameter The pulse width TH and the inter pulse width TL can be provided by the actual value of another already programmed function Analo
214. o set password next time the LCD will display L M 1 l2 3 14 15 16 I 18 19 lA IB IC ID N45 16 A E E E O O a O O O O O O O E EASY lt 3 ELC 26DC DAR Ge wa 6 0 6 0 6 0 610 6 0 6 0 6 0 6 0 6 6 6 Oe Lfd Lf f f f f ee ee ee ee es ee f Q1 Q2 Q3 04 Q5 Q6 07 Q8 0g 010 4 3 4 How to set address of CPU and expansion module A Set CPU address If there are more than one CPU in a certain communication network well then the address of CPU must be set differently each other You can change the address of CPU via xLogicsoft or via the panel key if the CPU with LCD panel The address range is from 1 to 247 for ELC series CPU User Manual xLogic Micro PLC L M 1 12 13 14 15 16 I7 18 19 IA IB IC ID 114115 116 ee0e0e000000000008080 EASY at ELC 26DC DAA es eee e2002000000000008680 de tan ee ee et ne f A todd Q1 Q2 03 Q4 05 O06 Qf Q08 QI 410 Confirm with OK KEEKEKE EKEKEKXKEKE IANS ELC 26DC DA R Change the address with arrow keys and confirm with Ok B How to set address of extensions Part 1 Set address of ELC 18 22 26 CPU S extensions ELC E 16DC D R etc Notes 1 Only one expansion module shall connect to CPU when you set expansion module address via panel key of CPU 2 Up to 9 expansion modules 9 digital analog extensions can be linked together 3 If more than one expansion module connect to CPU at the same time the address of expansion module must be different each othe
215. ode of the controller 1 automatic mode 0 manual mode Use the input R to reset the output AQ As long as this input is set the input A M is disabled The output AQ is set to 0 Analog value process value Influences the Output Sensor Type of sensor being used Min Minimum value value range 10 000 to 20 000 Max Maximum value value range 10 000 to 20 000 EASY xLogie Micro PLC A Gain Value range 10 00 B Offset Value range 10 000 SP Set value assignment value range 10 000 to 20 000 Mq Value from AQ with manual mode Value range O to 1 000 Parameter sets application related presets for KC TI and Dir see below KC value range 00 00 to 99 99 TI Integral value range 00 01 min to 99 59 min Dir Action direction of the value range or p Number of decimal value range 0 1 2 3 Output AQ Analog output manipulated variable Value range for AQ O to 1 000 Parameter P number of decimal places Only applies for portraying the values from PV SP Min and Max in a message text Timing Diagram The nature manner and speed with which the AQ changes depends on the parameters KC and TI Thus the course of AQ in the diagram is merely an example A control action is continuous therefore the diagram portrays just an extract EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC A disturbance causes the PV to drop as Dir is positioned upwards AQ decreases u
216. ol system and the running conditions of all xLogic and control remote xLogic by connecting the xLogic communication port RS232 USB Ethernet optional to the computer you can view the process of the control system 4 Document The program circuit can be saved and printed The analog values also can be saved in one excel file 6 8 Operation Instructions EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC 6 8 1 Menu Bar hen xLogicsoft is used to edit xLogic programs under customized mode some basic operations including files management opening and closing of the Tool Bar and Status Bar access to Help information are completed by using pull down menu under File Edit Tools SMS View and Help The Instruction Function list of xLogicsoft is characterized by its flexibility and variation according to the main selection It can be changed according to the current operation for convenience of your specific operations 6 8 1 1 File The instruction is mainly used for file management including creation opening saving and printing of files Fl xLogic Soft ELogicl File Edit Tools SMS View Help New gt Open Ctrl 0 Close Close All Documents Properties Save Ctrlts Save As Print Ctrl P Print Preview Print Setup r 1 E RSMAS ceshisms xlg 2 Register Test New xlg 3 SeaQuest Drum Counter_new xlg 4 FEP ERIEN AQ_AT xlg i Exit T ASYN Vitvus TUS TE Fig 10 1 File Menu
217. onnection you require from the Co menu The menu name Co is an abbreviation of the term Connector Logic operations The most elementary blocks are the logic operations e AND e OR 21 Inputs 11 and I2 are here connected to the OR block The last two inputs of the Q block remain unused These special functions offer you significantly greater performance e Pulse relay e Up down counter e On delay e Softkey The chapter entitled xLogic functions gives a full list of the xLogic functions Block representation on the xLogic Display The figure below shows a typical view of the xLogic Display As you can see it can show only one block at a time We have therefore introduced block numbers to help you check the circuit structure EASY xLogie Micro PLC This connector is not required a Another block is connected at this poin Input This connector is not required 4 Block number assigned by xLogic lt Output Assigning a block number xLogic assigns each new block in a circuit program a block number xLogic uses these block numbers to indicate the block interconnections This means that these numbers are mainly an aid to your orientation in the circuit program BO 4 Block numbers 02 Bo 01 The figure above shows you three views of the xLogic Display which represent the circuit program As you can see xLogic interconnects the blocks using their numbers Advantages of block numbers
218. op ELC12 E AQ OUTPUT 2x 0 20mA 010101010 11 12 0 20mA i were 20mA R1 lt 2500 ELC RS485 Actually ELC RS485 is just a converter with photo isolation bringing out 3 wiring terminals short circuited inner of such 3 terminals so only one channel RS485 bus available from RS485 port 2x8pin of CPU for your easy connection with other devices OO0000000000 Ew Te Smeren ELAS OO000000000 OOOO000 00000 at Br ar B AH Be RT R If RT1 RT2 terminal are short connected one 120R resistor will be connected between A and B 3 4 4 Communication port instructions ELC 18 ELC 22 and ELC 26 CPUs ar Manual EASY xLogie Micro PLC Programming R Szaz port COOOAOOOOOOOOOO Expansion R5485 port R 232 port programming Expansion RS485 port 1 Programming port RS232 port ELC RS232 ELC USB ELC Copier should be inserted in this port When the programming port should be used as the standard RS232 port D shape 9 pin header the ELC RS232 cable needed Blow is show you the pin definition of the header 2 Expansion port RS485 pin definition J o o o p a a o A 8 Oo wb _ m Z 3 RS485 A 5 RS485 B EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC Communication between CPU and expansion module will use 4 7 9 15 pin ELC RS485 module need when ELC 18 CPU communicate with the third party
219. or Operator2 Second operator Operator 3 Third operator Priority 1 Priority of first operation Priority 2 Priority of second operation Priority 3 Priority of third operation P number of decimals Range of values 0 1 2 3 Output AQ The output AQ is the result of the equation formed from the operand values and operators AQ will be set to 32767 if a divide by O or overflow occurs and 32768 if a negative overflow underflow occurs Parameter p number of decimals The values V1 V2 V3 and V4 can be provided by the actual value of another already programmed function Analog comparator Ax Ay Analog trigger Ax Analog amplifier Ax Analog multiplexer AQ Analog ramp AQ Analog math AQ PI controller AQ Data latching relay AQ Up Down counter Cnt Parameter p applies to the display of V1 V2 V3 V4 and AQ in a message text Description of the function The analog math function combines the four operands and three operators to form an equation The operator can be any one of the four standard operators or For each operator you must set a unique priority of High H Medium M or Low L The high operation will be performed first followed by the medium operation and then by the low operation You must have exactly one operation of each priority The operand values can reference another previously defined function to provide the value The analog
220. or or a block Confirm with OK Press ESC to return to the previous step Rule 4 Planning e Before you start to create a circuit program you should either first create a design on paper or program xLogic directly using xLogicsoft exLogic can only save complete and faultless circuit programs 5 5 Writing and starting the circuit program After you have designed a circuit you want to write it to your xLogic The small example below shows how to do this ar Manual EASY xLogie Micro PLC 5 5 1 Selecting programming mode la You have connected xLogic to the power supply and switched it on The display now shows you the message Switch xLogic to programming mode by pressing ESC This will take you to the main menu of xLogic The first character in the first line is the gt cursor Press 4 and to move the gt cursor up and down Move it to Program and confirm with OK xLogic opens the programming menu xLogic s programming menu Here you can also move the gt cursor by pressing A and F Move the gt cursor to Edit and confirm with OK So The Edit menu of xLogic Move the gt cursor to Edit Prg for editing the circuit program and confirm with OK xLogic now shows you the first output The first output of xLogic User Manual xLogic Micro PLC Note Because we have not yet saved a password for the circuit program in xLogic you can directly enter editing mo
221. orresponds with the configured shift register bit The shift direction can be changed at a special input Input In The function when started reads this input value EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLG eeeeseseaesesi lt i Input Trg The SFB is started with a positive edge Ot 1 transition at input Trg Trigger A 1 to O transition is irrelevant Input Dir You define the shift direction of the shift register bits S1 S8 at the Dir input Dir 0 shift up S1 gt gt S8 Dir 1 shift down S8 gt gt S1 Parameter Shift register bit that determines the value of output Q Possible settings S1 S8 Retentivity set on the status is retentive in memory Output Q The output value corresponds with the configured shift register bit Timing diagram In Trg a Dir Sl OL th 0 1 1 D 1 2 LO ted 14 iy BS wo Oo ho 1 0 S40 0 0 o vy 4 a S a D 0 0 0 wo plej S ta 1 oO 0 0 Oo er D 1 1 o 0 OF yo s da o 1 1 o 6d 1 Shitt up Shit down Setting the Par parameter View in programming mode EASY xLogie Miero PLC BOO 1 4 Retentivity enabled Q 5 1 Preset Press A etc You can select 1 58 This special function is not available in parameter assignment mode Description of the function The function reads the value of input In with a positive edge 0 to 1 transition at input Trg Trigger This value is written to shift register bits S1 or S8 depending on the
222. os xLogie Micro PLC User Manual IA V i i s vi Ah Y IYA T i 1 i p a a y TEL 86 25 32893099 FAX 86 29 92891028 URL www xlogic plc com Emait sales xlogic relay com
223. ount 12 digital 6 relays no yes yes AC240V 10A DC12 24V 12 6 relays no yes yes 2 Routes 14KHZ digital 10A 6 yes yes 2 Routes 14KHZ Expansion Supply voltage I ELC 18AC R E AC110 ELC 18DC D R E ELC 18DC D TP E NPN DC12 24V 12 digital e transistor 0 3A User Manual iL CS xLogie Micro PLC yes yes 2 Routes 14KHZ ELC 18DC D TN E PNP DC12 24V 12 digital transistor 0 3A ELC 18DC DA R E DC12 24V 8analog 6 relays o yes yes 2 Routes 14KHZ digital 10A Adigital ELC 18DC DA TP E NPN DC12 24V 8analog o yes yes 2 Routes 14KHZ digital transistor 4digital 0 3A ELC 18DC DA TN E PNP DC12 24V 8analog yes yes 2 Routes 14KHZ e digital transistor 4digital 0 3A Upgraded ELC 18 CPU UNITS ELC 18AC R U Yes AC110 12 digital 6 relays no yes yes AC240V 10A ELC 18DC D R U DC12 24V 12 digital 6 relays no yes yes 2 Routes 60KHZ 10A ELC 18DC D TP U NPN DC12 24V 12 digital 6 2 ch Q5 Q6 yes yes 2 Routes 60KHZ transistor 0 3A ELC 18DC D TN U PNP DC12 24V 12 digital 2 ch Q5 Q6 yes yes 2 Routes 60KHZ transistor 0 3A ELC 18DC DA R U DC12 24V 12 digital 6 relays no yes yes 2 Routes 60KHZ 10A ELC 18DC DA TP U NPN DC12 24V 12 digital 2 ch Q5 Q6 yes yes 2 Routes 60KHZ transistor 0 3A ELC 18DC DA TN U PNP DC12 24V 12 digital 2 ch Q5 Q6 yes yes 2 Routes 60KHZ transistor 0 3A Sta
224. parameters Type momentary pushbutton and Status On momentary action switch Timing diagram User Manual xLogic Micro PLC Description of the function he output is set when input En is set and the Status parameter is set to On and confirmed with OK This action is performed irrespective of a configured switch or pushbutton function The output is reset to 0 in the following three cases e With a 1 to O signal transition at input En e When a pushbutton function is configured and one cycle has expired after its actuation e When the Status parameter sets the Off status in configuration mode and this has been confirmed with OK Particular characteristics to be noted when configuring The softkey can be used both with momentary pushbutton or switching action At the status parameter you can define the on actuated or off state for the switch pushbutton If the softkey is assigned a pushbutton action the output is always set for the duration of one cycle with a 0 to 1 transition at input En when the pushbutton is in on state or if the pushbutton state changes from Off to On when En 1 Setting the Par parameter View in programming mode example 1 Select the Softkey function 2 Select input En and confirm with OK The cursor is now positioned below Par 3 Change to the input mode of Par Confirm with OK the cursor is now positioned to Off BOO 1 lt 4 The status i
225. port only can be connected to xLogic main module moreover it has same features as ELC RS232 module so it is quite convenient for user whose computer has no standard serial port xLogic Ethernet module Model ELC Ethernet eee User Manual EASY xLogie Micro PLC It is called Ethernet module used to connect xLogic main modules in different places to enormous Ethernet to buildup a huge monitoring and control system It contains DC and AC two types xLogic SMS module Model ELC SMS D R ELC SMS D R is kind of SMS module through which SMS can be regarded as expansion input by user to realize wireless remote control and it can send alarm messages to user cell phones Communication Network xLogic offers different ways to communicate within the system RS485 port RS485 communication module needed The RS485 port is used for communication between the CPU and various devices or equipments which have the standard RS485 port Communicate using Modbus RTU ASCII protocol Master RS232 or USB port ELC ES232 ELC USB needed If there is no network required and only one main module with some expansion modules is needed for the application the down and upload of the project to and from the main module happens over the standard RS232 or USB port It allows system maintenance like monitoring too Rs232 Master slave 1 slave 2 slave 3 Ethernet network If the application requires a system where
226. put can be used to invert the output signal of the active asynchronous pulse generator Parameter TL TH You can customize the pulse TL pause TH ratio Retentivity set on the status is retentive in memory Output Q Q is toggled on and off cyclically with the pulse times Ty and TL EASY xLogie Micro PLC Parameter k a The pulse width TH and the inter pulse width TL can be provided by the actual value of another already programmed function Analog comparator Ax Ay Analog trigger Ax Analog amplifier Ax Analog multiplexer AQ Analog ramp AQ Analog math AQ PI controller AQ Data latching relay AQ Up Down counter Cnt The value of TH TL can be set modified in parameter mode For information about how to modify refer to chapter 5 2 2 please Timing diagram En w on a Description of the function You can set the pulse pause ratio at the TH Time High and TL Time Low parameters The INV input can be used to invert the output signal The input block INV only inverts the output signal if the block is enabled via EN If retentivity is not set output Q and the expired time are reset after a power failure 6 5 8 Random generator En Short description The output of a random generator is toggled within a configurable time Connection Peserintion OoOo Input En The positive edge 0 to 1 transition at the enable input En EASY xLogic Micro
227. put to lap time A negative edge 1 to O transition at input Lap resumes the stopwatch and set the output to current elapsed time Input R A signal at input R Reset clears the current elapsed time and lap time Parameter ime base for elapsed time which you can set to hours minutes seconds or 1 100ths of seconds Output AQ he output AQ outputs value of the current elapsed time when it is a negative edge 1 to 0 transitio at the input Lap and outputs value of the Lap time when it is a positive edge 0 to 1 transition at the input Lap A positive edge 0 to 1 transition resets the value at output AQ to O0 Parameters Time base You can configure the time base for the analog output EASY User Manual EEC xLogic Micro PLC BOOS 85 Stopwatch Farameter Comment Block name Time Base Minutes M N Hours l Retentivi Me tee Seconds 10 milliseconds The time base for the elapsed time can be in hours minutes seconds or 1 100ths of seconds units of 10 milliseconds The smallest time base and therefore the resolution is 10 milliseconds or 1 100ths of seconds Timing diagram Description of the function When En 1 the current time increases When En O the current time counting pauses When En 1 and Lap O the output AQ outputs the value of the current elapsed time When En 1 and Lap 1 the current time continue increasing but the output AQ outputs th
228. puts and DC 0 10V and 0 4 20mMA outputs Low cost Some of the things xLogic can do for you The xLogic Micro PLC provides solutions for commercial industrial building and domestic applications such as lighting pumping ventilation shutter operations or in switching cabinets The application field is widespread and these are just a few to mention Using the RS485 bus and Ethernet connectivity allows the user to realize various extensive real time monitoring and control applications Utilizing the optional SMS module the systems can furthermore be remotely controlled via GSM cell phone SMS Alarms status updates and any other desirable messages can be provided at set triggers Special versions without operator panel and display unit are available for series production applications in small machine installation and cabinet building environments to further slash cost xLogic devices xLogic Basic is available in two voltage classes Classes 1 DC12 24V i e ELC 6DC Series ELC 12DC series ELC 18 series ELC 22 series and ELC 26DC Series SSR 12DC series Classes2 AC110 240V i e ELC 6AC Series ELC 12AC series ELC 18AC series ELC 22AC series and EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC LC 26AC series SSR 12AC series In the versions With Display ELC 18 Series 12 inputs and 6 outputs Optional With without Display ELC 12 Series 8 inputs and 4 outputs ELC 22 Series 14 inputs and 8 outpu
229. r otherwise the system CPU expansions would run abnormal You shall first select the FUNCTION PAGE Read 5 2 1 Press or Y key to move the cursor to Set address 2 Press OK key to confirm Set adr 3 Press or Y key to move the cursor to Set E adr 4 Press OK key to confirm Set E adr L M 1 l2 13 14 I5 I6 I 18 19 lA IB IC ID 14115 N6 A E E E E a a a a a a a a a a FAS lt 4 as 4 ELC 26DC DA R Escl ok eeee000060000000000608680 eee ge a ee f f A f f Q1 Q2 03 Q4 05 Q6 07 08 09 Q10 3 Move the cursor to the place of parameter to be modified by pressing a or gt key 4 Modify value by pressing A or key aie User Manu xLogie Micro PLC L M 1 l2 13 i4 15 Ib I 18 19 l IB IC ID 114115 116 EASY FiO F2 Fa a a 3st lt 3 ELC 260C D4 F eo ca 6 0 06 6 A 6 66 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 gee a Se ec el ee ee ee Oe a el a re i el E a 1 Q2 Q3 G4 05 D6 OF 08 D3 10 5 Confirm the value after modification by pressing OK key Part 2 Set address of ELC 12 CPU S extensions ELC12 8DC DA R etc 1 Plastic slice Step 1 Using a screwdriver take the plastic slice down and we ll find a dial swith 2 Dial the switch as the below instructions to set the address what you need Up to 8 extensions includes IO AQ AI PT100 modules can be connect with the CPU The default address of ELC12 extensions is 1 and the dial switch as below Address 1 E means t
230. r entries with OK Setting the time Set the time T 12 00 minutes Move the cursor to the first digit Press or Select the digit 1 Press A o Y Shift the cursor to the second digit Press do gt 1 2 3 4 Select digit 2 Press or Y 5 Move the cursor to the unit Press 4 or 6 Select the timebase m for minutes Press amp or Showing hiding parameters the parameter protection mode If you want to show hide the parameter and allow prevent its modification in parameter assignment mode 1 Move the cursor to the protection mode Press dor 2 Select the protection mode Press A or The display should now show The display should now show _ Pod T 12 00m T 12 00m or Protection mode The value Protection mode The value ofthe ime T can be modified of the time T is hidden in in parameter assignment parameter assignment mode mode 3 Confirm your entries with OK aa ser Mana EASY xLogie Micro PLC Enabling disabling retentivity ff To decide whether you want to retain your current data after a power failure or not 1 Move the cursor to the retentivity setting Press ao 2 Select the retentivity setting Press or Y The display now shows Protection mode The value Protection mode The value ofthe time T can be modified of the time T is hidden in in parameter assignment parameter assignment mode mode 3 Confirm your entries with OK Note
231. reshold On fo ose P Decimals in the message text jo H 12345 Protection Active cme nas We Note The decimal point setting must be identical in the min and max range View in parameter assignment mode example B3 On 04000 4 On threshold Off 02000 Off threshold Dec 0 Decimals in the message text 6 5 23 Analog amplifier User Manual xLogic Micro PLC Short description Ma This SFB amplifies an analog input value and returns it at the analog output Input the analog signal to be amplified at input Ax Use the analog inputs AI1 AI8 the analog outputs AQ1 and AQ2 AI1 AI8 0 10 V corresponds with O 1000 internal value Parameter A Gain Range of values 10 00 B Zero offset Range of values 10000 p Number of decimals Range of values 0 1 2 3 Output AQ Analog output Value range for AQ 32768 32767 Parameter p number of decimals Applies only to the display of Ax and Ay values in a message text Does not apply to the comparison of On and Off values The compare function ignores the decimal point Description of the function The function reads the value of an analog signal at the analog input Ax This value is multiplied by the gain parameter A Parameter B offset is added to the product i e Ax gain offset Actual value Ax 6 5 24 Analog value monitoring Short description This speci
232. ress ESC to enter the parameter assignment mode Select the Stop command confirm with OK then move the gt cursor to Yes and once again confirm with OK For additional details see the topic The four golden rules for operating xLogic 2 On the main menu select Program 3 On the Programming menu select Edit confirm with OK Next select Edit Prg and confirm with OK If required enter your password at the prompt and confirm with OK You can now modify the current circuit program Adding a block to a circuit program EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC ove the cursor to the B in B1 B1 is the number of the OR block To move the cursor Press lt q We now insert the new block at this position Confirm with OK Press Y to select the SF list The SF list contains the special function HSF Q1 Press OK The block of the first special function is shown M When you select a special or basic function block Trg i XLogic shows you the relevant function block The Par aL Q1 solid square cursor is positioned on the block Press W or to select the required block Select your block off delay see the next figure and then press OK Before you press OK this shows the entry Trg i B2 ss The added block is assigned the block number Ne Co B2 The cursor is positioned at the top input of R FL Q1 the added block Par Press Y or to select BN option B2 _BN JL R a Par 81
233. resssisrsrrestrrnrsrsrsrersrrnrstnrnrererrerrrsen 103 i Oe Clr Me a E aaa a E ET E E A E A E 105 ofa el FO AE a A EA EE A Tarte a 107 Cg OAS AN E AN EE E fo ec E A A E A E 110 Gea O O AE a E E E E E E eee 111 i Retentie Om delay ena EA A 113 Eso WONG relay Puce GUTTULA N AEE 114 ODO Edge mggered wiping relay erer ete ene ene ereR earn eee ee eee 115 6 5 7 Asynchrono s pulse generato geet ee ener ee een er eee een ee 117 oto Psi Rdm O NEO penn meee tenement enter mere rennet rennet keene ee ee ere ere 118 6 5 9 Stairway Wanting SWI ereinen a eE EES E RNET S ES 120 CS O Mutine TATION EN E o E E A E ETE OEO AA S 122 CaA NEERA e meer et a ne E E E ee 123 xLogie Micro PLC 6 5 12 Yearly UME arena E E EE RRE cede teeeteticians 127 e a esl U DON OU E E EE A a7 132 ff apo me A alle eel ig E peer Tree ne ert O ee eee ne A E ee ee 134 i WATS ONL Ur 1G ST eterergsrtre nists eee N E E ease ieanmidaatgernmnisamnetant 136 owe te Eom Bc roga i ch Reet AA E ere erent ert N I Terre ne mnt E rrr eer een 138 i DF PU Se Vy acter A ert dees E erates tavede E nectar E S 139 ao Mees ae yc enero a ener Teron OP ETN Mt reer er ETT Re E A erm ee mer er eer terre eee 140 6 5 18 1 How to change parameters of blocks in displayed MESSAGE ccc eeeeeeeteteeteeeeeees 148 RSME eco ge lt a Renee er T O A A E em me ee O een eee A E E ee ee 150 i SU Te actrees re cert arc E eae enn conta A E 152 CeL PN O RUN cachet A Reagent E tde tals OEE ENTA A OOE OEE 154 Go
234. rmanent lighting function is enabled and output Q is set accordingly The off delay time T is triggered when the status at input Trg changes to O before the time T has expired Output Q is reset when the Ta T Before the off delay time T T has expired you can output an off pre warning that resets Q for the duration of the off pre warning time Ti A further signal at input Trg always resets T and output Q Caution The time base for the T T and Ti must be identical If retentivity is not set output Q and the expired time are reset after a power failure 6 5 11 Weekly timer Caution 123 xLogie Micro PLC Your xLogic must be equipped with an internal real time clock if you are going to use this SFB iy Short description The output is controlled by means of a configurable on off date The function supports any combination of weekdays C comen peseur Parameter At the No1 No2 No3 cam parameters you set the on and off triggers for each cam of the weekly timer The parameter units are the days and the time of day Output Q Q is set when the configured cam is actuated Parameter You can configure a time hysteresis for each individual cam in parameter mode For information about how to modify refer to chapter 4 2 2 please Timing diagram three practical examples Me Mond ay Wednesday Fnday Sunday Tuesday Thursday Saturday Noi Daily 06 30 h to 08 00 h No2 Tuesday 03 10 h to 04
235. rnet AC Ta y Discontinued ee 110 240V AC Ethernet module connecting to ELC 12 CPU units AC type External fuse required On 35 mm standard mounting rail 4 MW or wall mounting W X H X D 48 x 90 x 64 mm User Manual xLogic Micro PLC Inputs of which can be used in analog mode Input supply voltage Permissible range with signal 0 with signal 1 Input current Outputs Continuous current Short circuit protection Switching frequency Cycle time Integrated time switches power reserve Connection cables Ambient temperature Storage temperature Degree of protection Certification 329 12 digital none 110 240V AC 85 265 V AC 100 253 V DC max 40 V AC 0 03 mA min 79 V AC 0 08 mA 6 relays 10 A with resistive load 2 A with inductive load External fuse required 2 Hz with resistive load 0 5 Hz with inductive load lt 0 1 ms function Yes typ 10 h 2x 1 5 mm or 1 x 2 5 mm 0 0 55 OC 40 C to 70 oe IP20 CE 12 digital none 12 24V DC 10 8 V 28 8 V DC max 3 V DC imA min 8 V DC 1 5 mA 6 relays 10 A with resistive load 2 A with inductive load External fuse required 2 Hz with resistive load 0 5 Hz with inductive load lt 0 1 ms function Yes typ 10 h 12 digital 8 0 to 10V 12 24V DC 10 8 V 28 8 V DC max 3 V DC 1mA min 8 V DC 1 5 mA
236. ro PLC Motion detector exterior Bia es ee Wee A O O O O a sf S2 door closed Limit switch door open interior Be Q Motion detector ain switch 8 2 1 Standard solution consult circuitry L1 52 i Ka Ka Bpi Ba K3 Ka Sz 0 51 o Kd 7 Bt K2 KI B2 ki KCI Ka Ka N on off open wait for time As long as the detector B1 or B2 detects someone approach the switch K3 will be on and open the door If the two detectors don t detect person in a short time trigger K4 and close the door EASY xLogie Micro PLC 8 2 2 The scheme of xLogic open close buzzer Required components K1 open contactor K2 close contactor S1 break contact close limit switch S2 break contact open limit switch B1 make contact outdoor infrared action detector B2 make contact infrared action detector inside xLogic function block circuit program Motion detector During business hours if someone enters store the detector B1 will trigger electric motor to open the door vice versa At closing time the detector B2 make electromotor keep running for an hour to make more time for User Manual xLogic Micro PLC stomer to leave Trigger electromotor for opening door The output Q1 is switched on and triggers electromotor when Operate control switch I5 the door is open all the time The detector indicates that somebody is approaching to the door The door ha
237. rotection Active Cancel Help In the astronomical clock dialog you can select the location of the xLogic device You can select one of following pre defined time zone locations Beijing Berlin London Rome Moscow Tokyo Washington Ankara Madrid Amsterdam If you select one of these locations xLogicsoft uses the latitude longitude and time zone of your selection Alternatively you can configure a specific latitude longitude and time zone for your location and provide a name for this custom location Based on the location and time zone xLogic calculates the absolute sunrise and sunset time for the current day The block also takes summer time winter time into consideration if it is configured on the computer where xLogicsoft is installed To do such configuration you should select check box of Automatically adjust clock for daylight for saving changes in the Date and Time Properties dialog Timing diagram 228 ar Manual EASY xLogie Micro PLC Monday Tuesday Wednesday Z m TR TS TR TS TR TS Description of function The function calculates the value at the input and sets or resets Q depending on the sunrise time and sunset time at the configured location and time zone of the module 6 5 47 Cam Control Short description The cam programmer function Cam Control is used to control a set of 8 built in cam wheels On its 8 outputs representing the 8 wheels the function provides the
238. s N means the Ethernet PLC in chapter 2 1 Added ELC 12DC DA R N ELC 22DC DA R N of model selection table in chapter2 2 Added the structure and dimensions about ELC 12DC DA R N ELC 22DC DA R N in chapter2 3 Added below new function blocks 6 5 38 Word to Bit 6 5 39 Bit to Word 6 5 40 Stopwatch 6 5 41 Analog filter 6 5 43 Average value 6 5 44 Device Reset 6 5 45 Comport Status Added configuration about Ethernet PLC Chapter 7 How to configure the Ethernet modem built in CPU 7 1 Configuration with DeviceManager 7 2 Establish communication between CPU and xLogicSoft SCADA via Ethernet 7 3 How to establish the communication among CPUs via Ethernet Added the technical data about Ethernet PLC in chapter A 2 Technical data xLogic Added new function block 2013 38 10 6 5 46Astronomical clock 2014 2 27 Changed the description of the block Device Reset P Marked Discontinued to some CPU models Added new Ethernet PLC ELC 12AC R N amp ELC 22AC R N 2014 9 30 Added the start value for AF at chapter 6 2 9 Added the start value for the Data latching relay at chapter 6 5 34 Added new function blocks 6 5 47 Cam Control 6 4 48 Angular cam timer 6 5 49 Pumps management 6 5 50 Defrost EASY 2014 9 30 EASY Comparison of 2 values Multicompare Compare in zone Conversion word bits Conversion bits word Demultiplexer Multiplexing Multiplexing Square Boot Sin C
239. s Notes 1 ELC12 E extensions connect with ELC 12 CPU by ELC12 CB A bridge or ELC12 CB B connection cable 3 meters 2 ELC E extensions connect with ELC 18 ELC 22 or ELC 26 CPU directly by the connector with flat cable of the expansion module Removal To remove xLogic EPER if you have installed only one xLogic Basic 1 Insert a screwdriver into the eyelet at the bottom of the slide interlock and move the latch downward 2 Swing the xLogic Basic off the DIN rail EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC EASY CIRUN STOP i ELC12 E 8DC DA R p OUTPUT 21 01 4 Relay 3A OUTPUT 2x 06 8 RelayM0A q i x Logic ELC 12DC DA R BBBBBCoBBBooOHoHoBG OO GG 1 gt 29 a1 if you have connected at least one expansion module to xLogic Basic 1 Remove the connector 2 Slide the expansion module off towards the right 3 Insert a screwdriver into the eyelet at the bottom of the slide interlock and lever it downward 4 Swing the expansion module off the profile rail Repeat steps 1 to 4 for all other expansion modules 3 2 Wall mounting For wall mounting first slide the mounting slides on the rear side of the devices towards the outside You can now wall mount xLogic by means of two mounting slides and two M4 screws tightening torque 0 8 to 1 2 Nm E ASY xLogie Micro PLC Mounting slides Drilling template for wall mounting Before you
240. s Main Module Dimensions 72 x 90 x 68 mm Approx 250g W x H x D Weight W x H x D Weig on a 35 mm profile rail or wall Installation mounting ELC12 E Series Expansion Module ELC 6 series CPU 48 x 90 x 64 mm Dimensions Approx 180g on a 35 mm profile rail or wall W x H x D Weight f mounting Installation ELC E 16 Series Expansion Module Dimensions EO a mm Approx 250g W x H x D on a 35 mm profile rail or wall Weight mounting Installation ELC 22 amp ELC 26 Series CPU Dimen OnE 133 X 90 x 55 mm W x H x D Weight Approx 500 g inte ee EUC on a 35 mm profile rail or wall mounting Climatic conditions Ambient temperature Horizontal mae a to l installation High temperature to pa ts Vertical installation IEC 60068 2 2 User Manual Storage shipping Relative humidity Air pressure Pollutants Criterion Ambient mechanical conditions Protection mode Vibrations Shock Drop Free fall packaged Electro magnetic compatibility EMC Emission Conducted Emission Emission Radiated Emission Harmonics Current Harmonics Flicker Voltage Fluctuation ESD Electrostatic Discharge RF Field Radiated Immunity Burst Electrical Fast Transients Surge Transients comm amp diff mode applies only to ELC AC types RF com mode RF continues conducted V dips Voltage dips and Interruption Cycle time Cycle time per function IEC 60068 2 30 IEC 60068 2 42 IEC 60068 2 43
241. s not been opened entirely 14 limit switch is not off Trigger electromotor for closing door Operate control switch I16 the door is closed all the time The detector indicates that nobody is approaching the door The door had not been closed entirely I3 limit switch is not off Buzzer Connect the buzzer to output Q3 When the door is going to be closed the buzzer gives off sounds for a short time 1s in this example To attach buzzer need to connect the following circuit program to output Q3 0 close door output 03 buzzer 8 3 Ventilation system EASY xLogie Micro PLC Requirements for a Ventilation system ii ea A Ventilation system supplies fresh air into a room and exhausts the contaminated air Let us look at the following sample system ry fresh air fan Ug flow monitor extractor fan y 7 tor B 7 flow monitor Y hk d e Aroom contains an extractor fan and a fresh air fan e Each fan is monitored by means of a flow sensor e The pressure in the room may rise above the atmospheric pressure e The fresh air fan may only be switched on if the flow sensor signals the safe operational state of the extractor fan e A warning lamp indicates failure of one of the fans 8 3 1 Standard solution The control circuit diagram of Ventilation system formerly as follows EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC exhaust gas fresh air operate fault The fans
242. s not retentive T hp Button lt Momentary pushbutton function status Off 4 Q is set in the first program cycle after program start To change Par to Switch action and the initialization status after the program start 4 To select Momentary pushbutton or Switch action Press A or Y B001 4 Ihe status is not retentive T Switeh Switch status Off Q is set in the first program cycle after program start 5 To change to the start state Press lt a or gt 6 To change the start state Press or Y xLogie Micro PLC BO 1 lt The status is not retentive E a T Switch lt Switch status On lt Qis set in the init program cycle after program start 7 Confirm your entries with OK View in parameter assignment mode example Here you can set or reset the Switch parameter On Off When in RUN xLogic shows the following display B 1 The pushbutton switch here is Switeh On switched on Let us assume you want to set Switch Off 1 Change to the editing mode Confirm with OK the cursor is now positioned on On 2 To change from On to Off Press A or Y 3 Confirm your entries with Press OK B 1 cwi tge h 0f f The pushbutton switch here is switched off 6 5 20 Shift register In Tr Dir Par Short description The shift register function can be used to read an input value and to shift the bits The output value c
243. sage is not connected with other blocks EASY User Manual Manual programming menu After being powered on xLogic shall self check program stored in the CPU If the program is accurate then the CPU will be running meanwhile the system cover will show as follows In xLogicsoft this interface is defaulted as its initialization screen L M WW l2 13 14 16 1B I 18 19 l IB IC ID 1415116 00 0 00 00 0 00 00 000 010 mo r m7 S ih oy SAS U ne V ELC 26DC DA R E Ok Yo bf bf f OLY Lf OLY f A Ld G3 o 05 0E o of 99 gi If there are several parameter pages users can press a or gt key to go to the page you would like The last page is the cursor mode ser Manua EASY xLogie Micro PLC L M N 12 13 14 15 16 I7 18 19 JA IB IC ID 1411516 0 0 0 0 010 0 0 0 0 0 0 010101010 7 fe EASY ELC 260C D 4 F OOOO O00 00000000000 l L E a L Ef r ae L LF a L a L a 9i gz 03 BE Q5 OE EF 08 TE 010 Cursor keys can be controlled in this page by press arrow keys and ESC key at the same time If xLogic has several alarm interfaces in the same period and it only displays the message with highest priority in the function block also you may go through all alarm messages by pressing A or key Note The message text block would be treated as parameter page only when it has no input otherwise it may be regarded as alarm page When input has high pulse LCD shall display alarm message
244. se required 10 Hz lt 0 1 ms function Yes typ 72 h On 35 mm standard mounting rail 4 MW or wall mounting WxHxD 72 x 90 x 68 mm PC cable RS232 or USB or USB No No PC cable RS232 PC USB No cable RS232 or 8 digital none 12 24V DC 10 8 V 28 8 V DC max 3 V DC 1mA min 10 V DC 1 5 mA 4 transistors NPN 0 3 A External fuse required 10 Hz lt 0 1 ms function Yes typ 72 h PC cable RS232 or USB No User Manual xLogic Micro PLC xLogic lt gt network No No No No Ethernet Third party Yes modbus Yes modbus Yes modbus Yes modbus device HMI lt gt xLogic Maximum program 64 blocks 64 blocks 64 blocks 64 blocks memory Data logging No No No No Extensions No No No No High speed input No No No No PWM No No No No HMI No No No No Note 1 The following function block cannot be used in Ecnomy ELC 12 CPUS Constant Cursor key Sms input output Sms message input output Analog Analog MUX PI Controller Analog Ramp Analog Math Analog Math error detection Miscellaneous Message texts Pwm Modbus Read Modbus Write 2 Model instruction ELC 12AC R E CAP ELC 12AC R E ELC COVER ELC 12DC D R E CAP ELC 12DC D R E ELC COVER ELC 12DC D TN E CAP ELC 12DC D TN E ELC COVER ELC 12DC D TP E CAP ELC 12DC D TP E ELC COVER b 325 User Manual xLogie Micro PLC Inputs of which can be used in analog mode Input supply vol
245. se relay to its initial state i e the output is set to logical 0 Either the input R takes priority over input S i e the signal at input S has no effect as long as R 1 or the input S takes priority over input R i e the signal at input R has no effect as long as S 1 depending on your configuration 6 5 18 Message text E F 1 Par Short description Display parameterized message texts and parameters of other blocks in RUN mode Gonmesion rtm Input En A 0 to 1 transition at En Enable triggers the output of the message text Input P P is the priority of the message text 1 is the lowest 32 is the highest priority Quit Acknowledgement of the message text Parameter Text Input of the message text Par Parameter or actual value of another already configured function see Visible parameters or actual values Time Shows the continuously updated time of day Date Shows the continuously updated date EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC EnTime Shows the time of the 0 to 1 transition EnDate Shows the 0 to 1 transition of the date Q remains set as long as the message text is queued Description of the function With a O to 1 transition of the signal at input En the display outputs your configured message text actual value text TOD date in RUN mode Acknowledgement disabled Ack Off The message text is hidden with a O to 1 signal transition at input En Acknowledgement enabled A
246. ser Manual 4 Channels 0 4 vie 20 mA Current Signal Ethernet module connecting to ELC 18 CPU units Accessories none RS232 communication module download cable between PC and xLogic CPU units USB communication module download cable between PC and xLogic CPU units SMS module can be connected to ELC 18 CPU units DC 24V power supply 6 digital inputs 4 relay outputs Standard ELC 22 Series CPU Units Supply voltage AC 110 240V DC12V DC24V DC12V DC24V DC12V DC24V DC12V DC24V AC 110 240V DC12V DC24V DC12V DC24V DC12V DC24V DC12V DC24V DC12V DC24V 8 relays 14 digital 10A 8 relays 14 digital 10A 8 relays 10A 8 transistors 8 digital analog I1 I18 6 digital I9 ID 8 digital analog 11 18 6 digital I9 ID PNP 8 digital analog 11 18 6 transistors digital I9 ID NPN 8 relays 10A 8 relays 10A 8 relays 10A 8 relays 10A 8 transistors 14 digital 14 digital 8 digital analog 11 18 6 digital I9 ID 8 digital analog 11 I18 6 digital I9 ID 8 digital analog 1I1 18 6 digital I9 ID PNP 8 digital analog I1 18 6 8 ELC COPIER can be used to save user program and download program into xLogics including all the ELC series and EXM series PLC High speed count 19 1A Max 14kHz IB 1C Max 60k Hz 19 1A Max 14kHz IB 1C Max 60k Hz 19 IA Max 14kHz IB 1C Max 60k Hz 19 IA M
247. signal Note There are a maximum of eight analog filter function blocks available for use in the circuit program in xLogicsoft 6 5 42 Max Min his input is enabled when you set Mode A positive transition 0 to 1 at input S1 sets the output AQ to the maximu value A negative transition 1 to 0 at input S1 sets the output AQ to the minimu value Input Ax is one of the following analog signals Analog Inputs Analog Outputs Analog flags Block number of a function with analog output Mode Possible settings 0 1 2 3 EASY xLogie Miero PLC Mode 0 AQ Min Mode 1 AQ Max Mode 2 and S1 0 low AQ Min Mode 2 and S1 1 high AQ Max Mode 3 or a block value is referenced AQ Ax AQ outputs a minimum maximum or actual value depending on the inputs o is reset to O if configured to do so when function is disabled Analog inputs O to 10 V corresponds with O to 1000 internal value Parameter Mode You can set the values for parameter Mode based on the actual values of another already programmed function Analog comparator Ax Ay Analog threshold trigger Ax Analog amplifier Ax Analog multiplexer AQ Analog ramp AQ Analog math AQ Up Down counter Cnt Threshold trigger Fre Max Min Ax PI controller AQ Analog filter AQ Average value AQ You can select the required function by the block number Timing diagram Ax m S1 If you select the
248. sor to next character press gt key Repeat the step 3 and 4 to realize the third and fourth character LCD displays L M 1 l2 13 14 I5 16 I7 18 19 lA IB IC ID 1411516 A E E E E O O O O a O a a E a FANS as at i ELC 26DC DAR Ge ow e eeee 00000000000000680 a a a a a a a ee ane fee Q1 02 03 04 05 Q6 Qf 8 0I Q10 4 Confirm new password press OK key So you have set the new password and then return to main menu How to remove the password In case you need to remove password e g allow the other users to edit your program then you must know the current password The process of removing password is the same as that of modifying password In the menu of the FUNCTION PAGE 55 ser Manu xLogie Micro PLC 1 Move the cursor to Password Press A or Y key 2 Confirm Password Press OK key Select Old and input primary password in our instance is 1234 the process is the same as the step 3 to step 10 mentioned above LCD displays as follows L M H l2 13 14 15 16 I7 18 19 lA IB IC ID 114115116 Seeeeeoeeoceeaeeceeese ena 6 EASY ELC 260C D4 F O 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 00 6 ee ee l L ad L d L adl L ad L d L l L ad L ad L ad 01 H2 0a O4 5 G6 oF gg FE 010 Input nothing under the New and let it keep blank to clear password 4 Confirm blank password press OK key Now you have cleared password and return to main menu If you want t
249. special function and the real analog output Using this amplifier you standardize the output range of the special function to a value range of O to 1000 6 5 27 System cover This block cannot directly be found in the block list however it is set as default by system of xLogic hence system cover can be available if you follow the below procedures use your mouse to left click Tools menu gt select Edit Cover HMI by left click in xLogicsoft Short description Display the status Run or Stop of xLogic when power on or simulation by soft Particular characteristics to be noted when configuring Parameter Comment Block name Messa ja Text Priority fi T Acknowledge Message Block Insert Parameter Protection Active 1 General area Here you will find the following settings A Priority of the system cover B Check box for message text acknowledgment 2 Messages area Users can edit the messages in the first and second line the third line displays the state RUN or STOP and 167 o ar Man a EASY EASY User Manual xLogie Micro PLC the messages saying whether your program has mistakes or not will be shown in the fourth line 3 Delete button The button is used for deleting the Messages in the first and second line ELC 26DC D4 F 6 5 28 Pulse Width Modulator PWM Short Description The Pulse Width Modulator
250. speed output allow the frequency different for Q3 amp Q4 of ELC 12 CPU and Q5 amp Q6 of ELC 22 26 and upgraded ELC 18 CPUs But if the high speed ticked in the dialog box then the frequency settings must be same for Q3 amp Q4 of ELC 12 CPU and Q5 amp Q6 of ELC 22 26 and upgraded ELC 18 CPUs 6 5 29 Analog Ramp Short Description The Analog Ramp instruction allows the output to be changed from the current level to a selected level at a specified rate Connection peseriton A change in the status from O0 to 1 at input EN Enable applies the start stop level Offset B StSp to the output for 100 ms and starts the ramp operation to the selected level A change in the status from 1 to 0 immediately sets the current level to Offset B which makes output AQ equal to 0 SelI 0 The step 1 level 1 is selected Input Sel SeI 1 The step 2 level 2 is selected A change in status of Sel causes the current level to start changing to the selected level at the specified rate Input St A change in the status from 0 to 1 at input St Decelerated Stop causes the current level to decrease at a constant rate until the start stop level Offset B StSp is reached The start stop level is maintained for 100 ms and then the current level is set to Offset B which makes output AQ equal to 0 Levell and Level2 Levels to be reached value range for each level 10 000 to 20 000 parameter MaxL Maximum value that must not be exceed
251. ss is 192 168 0 16 and the local port shall be set as 5001 User Manual EASY xLogic Micro PLC s below configure shows Basic Setting atures IF Configuration Server oe Channels Password Setting Apply Settings Re BOOTF Log Out rae Auta IF DHCF Host Name O Bac Address 00 0 Qa 05 T3 dT Auta Hegotiate Doae IF Address 192 166 0 16 Subnet 255 255 255 0 Gateway 192 166 0 1 Preferred DHS Server 192 1688 0 1 Alternate DNS Server 192 168 0 1 Basic Setting Hetwork Serial Fort Options Enable Server Channels Channel Protocol Rs232 FIFO 5 Data Bits Meet tsl Baud Rate 3600 Mil Flow Control werls BELL Connectionl Password Setting Apply Settings Re Log Out Enable Packing L Enable Idle Gap Time Work as server Local port 5001 end agp HOWE w Siam as asic Setting atwork aryver sal 7 J Channell Heer eet Remote Host 192 168 0 132 Sea Merea lll i Serial Settingl B000 as Connectionl Henge Jart Gate Fel ab Connect Response assword Setting aply Settings Restart 2g Out a i ive Connect Autostart T DHE Query Period 1600 4 Flush Input Buffer With Active Connect fith Passive Connect UseHostlist At Timeoft Disconnect On DSK Drop Flush Output Buffer Check FOT With Active Connect Hard Disconnect Hith Passive Connect Inactivity Timeou 15 At Timeof D
252. state corresponding to the current position of the shaft wheels The cam configuration can be set for each position output state is adjustable Once the maximum value has been reached the cam restarts from its initial position output returns to 0 Connection Description OSS Input Forward MOVE FORWARD is the input which is used to control cam progress it moves one step forward at each rising edge digital status is changed from O0 to 1 Input Reverse MOVE BACKWARD is the input which is used to control backward cam movement it moves one step backward at each rising edge digital status is changed from 0O to 1 Input Reset RESET initialization When this input is active the cam is replaced to its initial position the POSITION output will be forced to 0 Output Outputl1 The status of the 8 outputs is corresponding to the current position of the shaft representing the 8 wheels Output8 Position analog output corresponding to the current cam position 0 to 49 From the property dialog box you may adjust Parameters The number of program steps Its value is between 1 and 50 Output status 1 8 for each position of the shaft EASY Jser Manual WEZ o o xLogie Micro PLE o o el Op ta on Humber of progran steps ET Piss Uen af Sa SF S SS w SS 2 i 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 I a J U D 0 J F J 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 1 o oO Oo O 0 O 0 S 0 0 1 0 0 0
253. ste Inputs 0 T analog outputs 0 Economy Program memory 16354 Block names 256 7 i Cursor keys 4 ELC 22 Series Shift register 1 ELC 76 Series Shift register bits J Upgraded ma itn _ Fig 7 9 2 Hardware type selection Page layout set and hardware selection before programming In the Page Layout tab you can specify how and on how many pages to print your circuit program You can preview the pagination in this tab If you choose more than one program page the page breaks are indicated by white lines on the programming interface The hardware type selection is also needed be done before programming The available elements are showing in the right area in the above figure EASY xLogie Micro PLC Sevens ee gt bad te Etat Pri Lat Click the payout icon or double click the model displayed area on the right down of the interface the model selection dialog box also can pop out 6 9 1 2 Open Existed Document Operation Method 1 To open a document click Open option of menu File once with left button of mouse or click once in toolbar shortcut key CtrIl O also can be used As shown in Fig 11 3 e ms Config Tools SME View Hew Open Ctrlto Frint Setup 1 Standard tmt 2 FCA xef Exit Fig7 9 3 Open Existed Document 2 Click Open find the path of saving file dialogue box as follows
254. t 12 Press or 5 Apply 12 Press OK I2 is now connected to the input of the OR block The display now shows Your complete circuit program in xLogic up to now EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC 1001 B001 M1 We do not need the last two inputs of the OR block for this circuit program We shall now exit circuit programming mode To return to the programming menu Press ESC Note xLogic has now saved your circuit program to nonvolatile memory The circuit program remains in the xLogic memory until you explicitly delete it You can save the actual values of special functions in the case of a power outage assuming that these functions support the Retentive parameter and that the necessary program memory is available The Retentive parameter is deactivated when you insert a function to use it you must enable this option 5 5 4 Assigning a circuit program name You can assign your circuit program a name that consists of up to 16 uppercase lowercase letters numbers and special characters In the programming menu 1 Move the gt cursor to Edit Press 7 or amp 2 Accept Edit Press OK 3 Move the gt cursor to Edit Name Press 7 or amp 4 Accept Edit Name Press OK Press and Y to list the alphabet numbers and special characters either in ascending or descending order You can select any letter number or character To enter a space character simply move the cursor wi
255. t contents in the Record title of the Memory write block s property dialog box 2 File write mode Two options available Option A Append This option would be selected if a certain file is already existed in the Mini SD card inserted in ELC MEMORY B Create This option shall be chosen if no any file existed or existed file has different name from that jf Save Record Time pre set in the file name in the Mini SD card inserted in ELC MEMORY If such box has been ticked the file content will show the time when the data starts to be recorded 2011 81 30 19 52 37 Q1 011 111100061 segg0g8an00 4 Separator Such separator shall be required while more than one analog values would be stored and displayed for easier observation and convenient analysis 5 File Size It is an option for you to set the size of file to be stored 6 After memory Full Two options can be selected after memory is full it means the relative file has reached its pre configured size one is to over write and the other is to stop recording 7 Register params This section is for register s parameters setting The register includes following sorts A I digital inputs IGG a B Q digital outputs User Manual EASY xLogie Micro PLC Agal Q21 Q24 16 23 C F digital flag Fi oe o i sO OSO D M M status in fact it can be used to show the status of the function blocks Hi or Low B001 M1 E002
256. t diagram of industry gate open close flashing light EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC Required components Ki Main contactor K2 Main contactor SO break contact Off button Si make contact Open button S2 make contact Shutdown button S3 break contact Open position sensor S4 break contact Shutdown position sensor S5 break contact Safety bar xLogicSoft solution A xLogic circuit provides a further feature compared to standard controls The actuation of a safety bar interrupts the closing motion of the gate Five seconds before the gate is opens or closes a flashing light is activated and signals the start of the movement It continues flashing until the gate has stopped In contrast to standard solutions xLogic offers an easy and economic means of modifying the control system xLogie Micro PLC 8 5 Daylight lamp system Daylight lamp row 1 Daylight lamp row 2 E OI Daylight lamp row 3 Daylight lamp row 4 EE MMMM f f a f 4 re d r d f f f Lo kL Corridor A ff j p Fs Requirements for lighting system Different daylight lamp rows should be able to be switched on and off handily If window at one side has enough light the light will be switched off automatically via lightness sensitivity switch The light would be switched off automatically at 8 00 p m The light can be switched on and off manually at any time 8 5 1 Stand
257. t the counter to for the duration of the time to go MN That is Output Q O0 The measured operating hours OT 0 and The time to go of the maintenance interval MN MI Parameter MI Maintenance interval to be specified in hour units Range of values 0000 9999 h OT Expired total operation time An offset can be specified Range of values 00000 99999 h Q 0 When R is selected Q 1 if MN O Q 0 ifR 1orRal 1 When R En is selected Q 1 if MN 0 Q 0 ifR 1orRal 1orEn 0O Output Q The output is set when the time to go MN O The output is reset e When Q O R En if R 1orRal 1orEn 0 e When Q O R EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC Retort Timing diagram En Fal MIN MI hry OT MI Configured time interval MN Time to go OT Total time expired since the last 1 signal at the Ral input These values are principally held retentive Parameter The maintenance interval MI can be provided by the actual value of another already programmed function Analog comparator Ax Ay Analog trigger Ax Analog amplifier Ax Analog multiplexer AQ Analog ramp AQ Analog math AQ PI controller AQ Data latching relay AQ Up Down counter Cnt The value of MI can be set and modified in parameter mode For information about how to modify refer to chapter 4 2 2 please Description of the function The hours counter monitors input En As long as the status at this inp
258. ta logging device with a mini SD card slot for ELC amp EXM series CPUs The history data IO status analog value current value of registers of ELC amp EXM CPU ELC MEMORY can be recorded retrieved and viewed via it It is not applied to standard economic ELC 18 CPUs Standard ELC 6 Series CPU Units AC110 ELC 6AC R no 4 digital 2 relays 10A no no no yes AC240V ELC 6DC D TN Standard ELC 18 CPU UNITS Discontinued Supply voltage Outputs PWM HMI RTC High speed count AC110 12 digital 6 relays 10A yes yes AC240V DC12 24V 12 6 relays 10A yes yes 2 Routes 14KHZ digital DC12 24V 12 6 transistor digital 0 3A DC12 24V 12 6 transistor digital 0 3A DC12 24V 8analog 6 relays 10A digital Adigital 8analog 6 transistor 2 relays 10A no DC12 24V 4 digital 2 transistors PNP no Discontinued MODEL DESCRIPTION Expansion ELC 18AC R available ELC 18DC D R available ELC 18DC D TP NPN available yes yes 2 Routes 14KHZ 2 ch Q5 Q6 2 ch Q5 Q6 yes yes 2 Routes 14KHZ ELC 18DC D TN PNP available ELC 18DC DA R available ELC 18DC DA TP NPN yes yes 2 Routes 14KHZ available DC12 24V yes yes 2 Routes 14KHZ digital 0 3A 2 ch Q5 Q6 Adigital ELC 18DC DA TN PNP available DC12 24V 8analog 6 transistor 2 ch Q5 Q6 yes yes 2 Routes 14KHZ digital 0 3A Adigital Economic ELC 18CPU UNITS Discontinued Inputs Outputs PWM RTC High speed c
259. tage Permissible range with signal 0 with signal 1 Input current Outputs Continuous current Short circuit protection Switching frequency Connection cables Ambient temperature Storage temperature EASY 4 digital none 110 240V AC 85 a205 V AC 100 253 V DC max 40 V AC 0 03 mA min 79 V AC 0 08 mA 4 relays 10 A with resistive load 2 A with inductive load External fuse required 2 Hz with resistive load 0 5 Hz with inductive load 2x1 5 mm2 or 1 x 2 5 mm2 4 digital 4 0 to 10V 12 24V DC 10 8 V 28 8 VDC max 3 V DC imA min 8 V DC 1 5 mA 4 relays 10 A with resistive load 2 A with inductive load External required 2 Hz with resistive load 0 5 Hz with inductive load 20104 53a 40 2C to t 70 C fuse 4 digital 4 0 to 10V 12 24V DC 10 8V 28 8 VDC max 3 V DC 1mA min 8 V DC 1 5 mA 4 transistors P NP 0 3 A External fuse required 2 Hz 4 digital 4 0 to 10V 12 24V DC 1O08 V 28 8 V DC max 3 V DC 1mA min 8 V DC 1 5 mA 4 transistors N PN 0 3 A External fuse required 2 Hz 8 digital none 110 240V AC Sow 2605 V AC 100 253 V DC max 40 V AC 0 03 mA min 79 V AC 0 08 mA none External fuse required none User Manual 8 digital none 12 24V DC 10 8 V 28 8 V DC max 3 V DC mA min 8 V DC 1 5 mA
260. te a decimal value to the register of SLAVE please convert it to Hex format Hex f Manual FFFF FFFF 4 The following table shows how to set Note this table also can be applied for the configuration of Modbus Read function block Ti ian hess is 1 main hoes is 2 Data format instruction EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC AF AT AQ Signed Short For the detail information about I AI Q AQ registers address of xLogic refer to the RTU protocol file 6 5 34 Data latching relay Short description This special function saves the process variable of an analog input to memory and returns it at the analog output connection Description SSSSCS S Input S Save the Ax to memory and return it at the analog output with a signal at input S Set Input Ax Input the analog signal to be amplified at input Ax Use the analog inputs the block number of a function with analog output or the analog outputs Input R Reset analog output AQ to O with a signal at input R Reset analog Output AQ is reset if S and R are both set reset has priority over set Output AQ Analog output pm Value range for AQ 32768 32767 Example BOO AM1 Rem Off 0 00 672 When I1 turn to HIGH the value of AI2 will be saved to memory and return it to AQ1 as follows EASY xLogie Micro PLC When the I3 turns to HIGH the value of this function block will be reset
261. ted and the xLogic shall communicate with a peripheral device as a master via RS232 or RS485 interface Furthermore the output will be switched on when communication is established successfully Otherwise the output Q pin remains off which means communication has failed A signal at input R resets output Q and disables this block at the same time ser Manual EASY xLogie Micro PLC Connection Description Input En A high signal at En input will enable Modbus Read function block to be activated Input R Reset the value read from peripheral and set the output to O via the R Reset input Reset has priority over En Parameter Slave address 1 is default Communication protocol Modbus RTU Communication parameter baud rate BPS Data bits Stop bits Parity Overtime response time out Comm Type RS232 or RS485 Communication interface of xLogic Data register Index High Low Low High Command 01 Read coils O0x 02 Read Discrete Input 1x 03 Read Holding Registers 4x 04 Read Input Registers 3x Register start address count Output Q Q is set or reset depending on the communication status Successful communication Q 1 Failed communication Q 0 Note 1 Data register Index High Low Low High For example when High Low index was set one data 0x 00 12 was read and saved to AQ AQ OX0012 however when Low High index was set AQ 0x 1200 Regarding Modbus RTU detail please refer to our Modbus RTU
262. tentive in memory Q is switched on with a signal at input En and switched of with a low signal at input En Example1 BOO1 Ford to Bit Parameter Comment Block name Reference Word Data V Bit 0 Jv Bit 1 V Bit 2 N Bit 3 N Bit 4 v Bit 5 Iv Bit 6 NV Bit 7 IV Bit 8 IV Bit 9 V Bit 10 JV Bit 11 JV Bit 12 Jv Bit 13 V Bit 14 Jv Bit 15 Nm please select certain bit to output Bit 0 MV Show Parameters I Retentivity I Protection Active ed ee Ped ee Pe Aal f mi eK Oo allel tthe a eeel e Cancel i i Convert the AQ11 2012 to Q1 Q2 and F1 F14 0000011111011100 Example2 EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC Ren O Coude Fiz fm FIO z Daada PP Pe a Shartat Parmeetar Comment Block haan Tard Baia Bec HE Up Bene commer Eelerence mmn n l fe mn M a Fihi F i fe maig IF FE x Please select Fh Fo a ra rmi hi ho paipak mai IF re vo mi fw Bir G F F EF Shor F w Sele Dur enaiaTt w BaT F Fe 7 r D hitatiritF w mig F JET z 5 T re z T Feotection Active Bir oh keil as i b f z poe fiw ys 1 E 8 Oi Zj i F naw fF ro 7z fe mica I ro dag 1 0 W Bia F fm 4 F faa l pe F Bin ia F m3 lt W mas F
263. th P to the next position This character is the first one in the list Examples Press once to select an A four times to select etc The following character set is available EASY xLogie Miero PLC K L m fn fo a Let us assume you want to name your circuit program ABC Select A Press Move to the next letter Press b Select B Press Move to the next letter Press P Select C Press Confirm the complete name Press OK Om KR W N e Your circuit program is now named ABC and you are returned to the programming menu To change the name of your circuit program proceed in the same way 5 5 5 Assigning system cover Default display The message in first and the second line can be modified edit in the programming mode also can be modified in xLogic each line contains 10 characters each line contains 16 characters for ELC 22 26 series CPU In the programming menu 1 Move the gt cursor to Edit Press 7 or 2 Accept Edit Press OK EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC _ 3 Move the gt cursor to Edit CHMI Press Y or Accept Edit CHMI Press OK Press amp and Y to list the alphabet numbers and special characters either in ascending or descending order You can select any letter number or character To enter a space character simply move the cursor with to the next position This character is the first one in the
264. time the output will switch on if the record action had been done successfully connection Desciption OOS O Trg input Only when there is a low to high trigger at Trg pin the Memory write Read block will be activated and the pre configured record action will be performed Each trigger only write once Input R Reset the Memory Write block and set the output to 0 via the R hae Reset input Reset has priority over Trg Output Q Q switches on only after Write function had been executed correctly Description of Memory write block s property dialog box B003 E3 Nemory Frite Parameter Comment Block name File Params 1 File Name Durr txt lt Record Title Qi Q11 het oh oa Append V Save Record Time 4 Pes 3 Separator a File Size 10M 6 After Memory Full stop M 7 Register Params Register fa z Decimals Data Type fo zl Address 0 20 Count Retentivity Protection Active 1 File name Place where you can set the name of the file used to save the registers data EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC file in SD card of ELC MEMORY II ae Necccescccseeeeesssoseeesscoees 2 Record title Below is an example in the OUTPUT TXT 2011 81 38 13 52 25 J1 011 11110000100000HANONA 2811 81 36 132522317 O1 911 1111886681 06000606000666 2811 81 36 13252257 O1 911 1111788881 BH6688886668 The above range circled in red is just pre se
265. to 0 New feature from 2014 7 24 1 Start value you can set a start value for the data latch relay block now Parameter Comment Block name i O W Show Parameters Start Value 5821 I Reference Retentivity Protection Active ee 2 The HEG value of the data latch relay can be modified by press OK key for 3 seconds in text message block The HEG value of data latch relay block also can be displayed with decimal point now User Manual xLogic Micro PLC Parameter Comment Flock name E English Priority i a Message Text dl Acknowledge Message Jw Show Parameters Humber size 4 Smal1 tumb er C Lio Bloeks te ee Heuer fF i AF Hote Teer Double click co cm beet decimal and le Blaock Farameter BO01 M1 Asynchronou Re BO02 AM Data Latchi There is Modbus address for the HEG so you can also can change the HEG value by Master Touch screen etc You can found the address in the modbus RTU protocol Memory map file Note If your firmware of CPU cannot support such function you can download the firmware update package from our website 6 5 35 PI controller Short Description It is proportional action and integral action controllers You can use both types of controller individually or combined Set the m
266. troller are always retentive 6 4 5 Parameter protection In the parameter protection settings you can determine whether or not the parameters can be displayed and edited in xLogic parameter assignment mode Two options are available The parameter attribute permits read write access in parameter assignment mode default The parameter settings are read write protected in parameter assignment mode and can be edited only in programming mode See the parameter protection mode example in the Second circuit program 6 4 6 Calculating the gain and offset of analog values A sensor is connected to the analog input and converts a process variable into an electrical signal This value of signal lies within the typical range of this sensor xLogic always converts the electrical signals at the analog input into digital values from O to 1000 A voltage of 0 to 10 V or current signal 0 4 20mA at input AI is transformed internally into range of values from O to 1000 An input voltage exceeding 10 V is shown as internal value 1000 Because you cannot always process the range of values from 0 to 1000 as predetermined by xLogic you can multiply the digital values by a gain factor and then shift the zero of the range of values offset This allows you to output an analog value to the xLogic display which is proportional to the actual process variable Parameter O Minimum Maximum Internal value 0 1000 Offset 10000 10000 Mathematic
267. ts ELC 26 Series 16 inputs and 10 outputs ELC 18 Series is equipped with an expansion bus Can Bus Each Version is provides 44 pre configured standard and special function blocks for the creation of your circuit program Expansion modules ELC E applied to ELC 18 22 26 CPU xLogic digital modules are available for operation with 12 24V DC and 110 240 V AC and are equipped with eight inputs and eight outputs xLogic analog modules are available for operation with 12 24 V DC and are equipped with six digital and two analog inputs ELC12 E applied to ELC 12 CPU xLogic digital modules are available for operation with 12 24V DC and 110 240 V AC and are equipped with four inputs and four outputs xLogic analog modules are available for operation with 12 24 V DC and are equipped with four digital analog inputs Communication modules xLogic RS232 communication cable Model ELC RS232 It is kind of universal cable with photoelectricity isolation which can be directly connected to standard 9 pin port of PC also kind of interface module which can enable user s program to be downloaded into xLogic CPU through xLogicsoft for running It also is the connection cable between CPU and third party device with the RS232 port just like HMI in modbus communication system xLogic USB communication cable Model ELC USB It is kind of communication cable with photoelectricity isolation through which PC with USB
268. ts Analog Flags he block number of a function with analog output Parameter St Sampling time You can set it to Seconds Days Hours or Minutes Range of values If St Seconds 1 to 59 If St Days 1 to 365 If St Hours 1 to 23 If St Minutes 1 to 59 Sn Number of samples Range of values If St Seconds 1 to St 100 If St Days 1 to 32767 If St Hours 1 to 32767 If St Minutes and St lt 5 minutes 1 to St 6000 If St Minutes and St 6 minutes 1 to 32767 Y Jser Manua xLogic Micro PLC Output AQ AQ outputs the average value over the specified time of sampling Analog Inputs O to 10 V corresponds with O to 1000 internal value Parameter St and Sn Parameter St represents the sampling time and parameter Sn represents the number of samples Timing diagram l En i tt R l l l l l l l l l l I I I I l I I I I l I l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l I I I I I l l Sn l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l 1 2 Jo d 5 6 7 B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 E e oe sn 8 Sn 8 as St 10s Description of the function When En 1 the average value function calculates the average value of the samples during the configured time interval At the end of the sampling time this function sets output AQ to this calculated average value When En 0 the calculation stops and AQ retains the last calculated value When R 0 AQ is reset to 0 6 5 44 Device Reset Short description This fu
269. ttention Indicate that an unintended result or situation can occur if the corresponding notice is not taken into account If more than one degree of danger is present the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage Qualified Personnel The device system may only be set up and used in conjunction with this documentation Commissioning and operation of a device system may only be performed by qualified personnel Within the context of the safety notices in this documentation qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission ground and label devices systems and circuits in accordance with established safety practices and standards Please read the complete operating instructions before installation and commissioning EASY does not accept any liability for possible damage to persons buildings or machines which occur due to incorrect use or from not following the details EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC Prescribed Usage Note the following Warning This device and its components may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or the technical description and only in connection with devices or components from other manufacturers which have been approved or recommended by EASY Correct reliable operation of the product requires proper
270. uctive load External fuse required 2 Hz with resistive load 0 5 Hz with inductive load lt 0 1 ms function Yes typ 100h 16 digital none 12 24V DC 10 8 V 28 8 V DC max 3 V DC imA min 8 V DC 1 5 mA 10 relays 10 A with resistive load 2 A with inductive load External fuse required 2 Hz with resistive load 0 5 Hz with inductive load lt 0 1 ms function Yes typ 100h 2x 1 5mm ori x 2 5 mm 20 tO Foo oe 40 OC to 70 C IP20 CE 16 digital 8 0 to 10V 12 24V DC 10 8 V 28 8 V DC max 3 V DC 1mA min 8 V DC 1 5 mA 10relays 10 A with resistive load 2 A with inductive load External fuse required 2 Hz with resistive load with 0 5 Hz inductive load lt 0 1 ms function Yes typ 100 h 16 digital none 12 24V DC 10 8 V 28 8 V DC max 3 V DC ImA min 8 V DC 1 5 mA 10 transistors PNP 0 3 A External fuse required 10Hz lt 0 1 ms function Yes typ 100 h On 35 mm standard mounting rail 4 MW or wall mounting W X H X D 133 x 90 x 58 mm PC cable RS232 or PC cable RS232 or ser Manual _ PC cable RS232 or USB PC cable RS232 or USB 16 digital 8 0 to 10V 12 24V DC 10 8 V 28 8 V DC max 3 V DC ImA min 8 V DC 1 5 mA 10 transistors PNP 0 3 A External fuse required 10Hz lt 0 1 ms function Yes typ 100
271. up ELCsoft iol x Welcome to the ELCsoft Setup Wizard This will install ELCs ix It is recommended tl i continuing License Agreement Please read the following important information before continuing q Click Next to contin Please read the following License Agreement You must accept the terms of this agreement before continuing with the installation IMPORTANT NOTE WHEN YOU INSTALL sLogic YOU WILL BE GIVEN THE OPPORTUNITY TO INSTALL ADDITIONAL SOFTWARE PRODUCTS FROM THIRD PARTY PROVIDERS A LIST OF THE AVAILABLE THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE PRODUCTS WILL BE PROVIDED DURING INSTALLATION USE OF EACH AVAILABLE THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE PRODUCT IS GOVERNED BY ITS OWN END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT THOSE LICENSE AGREEMENTS WILL BE PRESENTED FOR YOUR REVIEW AND ACCEPTANCE DURING INSTALLATION OF EACH THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE PRODUCT zl accept the agreement C do not accept the agreement lt Back Next gt Cancel 4 Where is the program to be installed If you do not want to accept the recommended file location C Program Files EASY xLogicsoft specify another directory using Browse Haik Select Destination Location i Where should ELCsoft be installed Setup will install ELCsoft into the following folder To continue click Mest IF you would like to select a different folder click Browse C Program FilessEAS 7 SELCsoft sLogic 0 1 Browse At least 33 3 MB of free disk space is require
272. upper lower limit setting when the block output the AQ value is less than the lower value the AQ shall be equal to the Lower value While the block output the gt _E ar Manual EASY EA xLogie Miero PLC AQ value is more than the upper value the AQ shall be equal to the upper value iy If someone wants to use the upper lower limitation for other function blocks such upper lower limit a a function can be used then this block can be referenced as other blocks parameters when programming Here is an example Someone wants to use the panel key to change the on delay parameters for 1s 10s in the text message block if the value which user set exceeds such range then it will crush the machine hence we must add the upper lower limitation in the program to avoid such trouble 6 5 43 Average value Short description The average value function samples the analog input signal during configured time period and outputs the average value at AQ Connection pesni Input En A positive edge 0 to 1 transition at input En Enable sets the output AQ to the average value of input Ax after the configured time A negative edge 1 to Q transition holds the output at its last calculated value Input R A positive edge 0 to 1 transition at input R Reset resets the output AQ to 0 Input Ax Input Ax is one of the following analog signals Analog Inputs Analog Outpu
273. use the ELC COVER CABLE to connect the ELC HMI FP to the ELC 12 Basic module up to a distance of 1 5 meters This distance can be extended to up to ten meters by using a standard Sub D ia User Manua EASY cable together with the ELC COVER CABLE ia 3 4 wiring xLogic xLogie Micro PLC Wire the xLogic using a screwdriver with a 3 mm blade You do not need wire ferrules for the terminals You can use conductors with cross sections of up to the following thicknesses 1 x 2 5 mm 2 x 1 5 mm for each second terminal chamber Tightening torque 0 4 0 5 N m or 3 4 Ibs in Note Always cover the terminals after you have completed the installation To protect xLogic adequately from impermissible contact to live parts local standards must be complied with 3 4 1 Connecting the power supply EASY The ELC 6AC ELC 12AC ELC 18AC ELC 22AC and ELC 26AC versions of xLogic are suitable for operation with rated voltages of 110 V AC and 240 V AC The ELC 6DC ELC 12DC ELC 18DC ELC 22DC and ELC 26DC versions can be operated with a 12 or 24 VDC power supply Note A power failure may cause an additional edge triggering signal Data of the last uninterrupted cycle are stored in xLogic To connect xLogic to the power supply User Manual xLogic Micro PLC With DC power supply With AC power supply L 3 4 2 Connecting xLogic inputs 1 Requirements the inputs you connect sensor elements such as mo
274. ut is 1 xLogic calculates the time expired and the time to go MN xLogic displays these times when set to configuration mode The output is set to 1 when the time to go is equal to zero aaa User Manual EASY xLogie Micro PLC You reset output Q and the time to go counter to the specified value MI with a signal at input R The aS an operation hour counter OT remains unaffected You reset output Q and the time to go counter to the specified value MI with a signal at input Ral The operation hour counter OT is reset to 0 Depending on your configuration of the Q parameter the output is either reset with a reset signal at input R or Ral or when the reset signal is 1 or the En signal is 0 Limit value of OT The values of the operating hours in OT are retained when you reset the hours counter with a signal at input R The hours counter OT continues the count as long as En 1 irrespective of the status at the reset input R The counter limit of OT is 99999 h The hours counter stops when it reaches this value In programming mode you can set the initial value of OT The counter starts operation at any value other than zero MN is automatically calculated at the START based on the MI and OT values Example MI 100 OT 130 the result is MN 70 Parameter preset In xLogicsoft you can define MI and an OT start value You determine that Q does not depend on En by selecting the corresponding check box Retentivity with the
275. vailable for any modifications 5 It takes only a few key actions to download the circuit program to xLogic 6 Under Simulate mode in xLogicsoft you can study how to program via the panel key 6 1 xLogic Functions ELC series adapts programming methods by means of function blocks A total of 9 general function blocks 37 special function blocks and 11 input amp output function blocks are configured And each block can achieve a specific control function independently e g TOND TOFD SBPL TBPL SCHD etc As several blocks are linked up in a specific way relatively complicated control functions can be performed Programming with function blocks is simpler and better appreciated than the conventional PLC instruction programming ar Manual EASY 87 xLogie Micro PLC The following types of operator for xLogic function blocks are available for options 6 2 General Input amp Output functions 6 2 1 Inputs Te Input blocks represent the input terminals of xLogic Up to 8 digital inputs are available to you In your block configuration you can assign an input block a new input terminal if this terminal is not already used in the circuit program Property i x Parameter Simulation Comment Ext Module Conduct of analog output in SIOE mode 6 2 2 Cursor keys Up to four cursor keys are available to you Cursor keys are programmed for the circuit program in the same ways as oth
276. w Sitia f l Databits fe Paritybit Pes conn Tyra es a Tien F ie aratsean Baibas ET Date Reciater Index Mics Low Command OF Trite Single Coil Recitter addr p Canni TE kata Date addr f zl Ilof master is used to control the communication If I1 is high and the communication is established successfully one alarm message text message block will be displayed on LCD Then the Q1 of slave No 1 will be controlled by I2 of master If I2 is high Q1 of slave No 1 would be ON and if I2 is low Q1 of slave would be OFF Note The Q1 must be free it means the in the program of Slave No 1 the input pin of Q1 must be not linked to other blocks Example 2 manual mode input value EASY xLogie Micro PLC Parameter Comment BOO1 Show t Block name Hil 1 Slave Address jt Prio 1 E Quit Off Communicate Params BPS 9600 Stopbits 1 Databits e Paritybit None TS B002 m2 Comm Type R5485 v TimeOut fF 17105 o mA E O Protocol odbus TU gt Set Coil State Data Register Index High Low v Commanf 15 Write Multiple Coils 51 ee aad C huto Data addr E ja IV ja ja a E j ja r IV j g j ja a j Manual o fir Config OK Cancel He The above configuration is to force Q1 Q2 Q3 of Slave No 1 ON nf Coil On means pre set the BIT 1 Note The manual input value is Hex data it contains 4 bytes If you want to wri
277. watch Yes ELC MEMORY Analog Analog MUX PI Controller Analog Ramp Analog Math Analog Math error detection Analog filter Max Min Average value Miscellaneous Message texts Pwm Modbus Read Modbus Write word to bit bit to word device reset comport status Inputs of which can be used in analog mode Input supply voltage Permissible range with signal 0 with signal 1 Input current Outputs Continuous current Short circuit protection Switching frequency Cycle time Integrated time switches power reserve Connection cables ESSA 8 digital 4 0 to 10V 110 240V AC 85 265 V AC 100 253 V DC max 40 V AC 0 03 mA min 79 V AC 0 08 mA 4 relays 10 A with resistive load 2 A with inductive load External fuse required 2 Hz with resistive load 0 5 Hz with inductive load lt 0 1 ms function Yes typ 100 h 8 digital 4 0 to 10V 12 24V DC 10 8 V 28 8 V DC max 3 V DC 1mA min 10 V DC 1 5 mA 4 relays 10 A with resistive load 2 A with inductive load External fuse required 2 Hz with resistive load 0 5 Hz with inductive load lt 0 1 ms function Yes typ 100 h 2 1 5 mm or1x2 5 mm 8 digital 4 0 to 10V 12 24V DC 10 8 V 28 8 V DC max 3 V DC 1mA min 10 V DC 1 5 mA 4 transistors PNP O 3A External fuse required 10 Hz lt 0 1 ms function Yes typ 100 h VSel manudi 8 digital 4 0 to 10V
278. with a signal at input Dir Comoara You reset the output and the internal counter value to zero with a signal at input R Reset This function counts the O to 1 transitions at input Cnt It does not count 1 to 0 transitions Input Dir Direction determines the direction of count Dir 0 Up Dir 1 Down Parameter On On threshold Value range 0 99999999 Off Off threshold Value range 0 99999999 StartVal Initial value from which to begin counting either down or up Retentivity set on the status is retentive in memory Output Q Q is set and reset according to the actual value at Cnt and the set thresholds EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC jarameter The on threshold On and the off threshold Off can be provided by the value of another already programmed function Analog comparator Ax Ay Analog trigger Ax Analog amplifier Ax Analog multiplexer AQ Analog ramp AQ Analog math AQ PI controller AQ Data latching relay AQ Up Down counter Cnt The value of On Off and Cnt can be set modified in parameter mode For information about how to modify refer to chapter 5 2 2 please Timing diagram Description of the function The function increments Dir 0 or decrements Dir 1 the internal counter by one count with every positive edge at input Cnt You can reset the internal counter value to 000000 with a signal at the reset input R As long as R 1 the
279. wo setpoints MIN and MAX If MINI is greater than MAXI then for ON in the zone the output always remains inactive OFF in the zone the output always remains active Comparison Function The diagram below shows the different states the output can take depending on the input value to compare and the enable input EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC Enable Value to compare Min value Max value Output 6 5 54 Conversion Word bits Short Description When the En is high The DEC BIN function breaks down an integer 16 bit type input into 16 bit type outputs Illustration BITO1 BITO INPUT j ae BIT15 BIT 16 One 16 bit word 16 bits Inputs Outputs This function supports 1 integer type 16 bit input This function supports 16 discrete outputs BITO1 least significant byte BIT16 most significant byte 6 5 55 Conversion bits Word Short Description EASY xLogie Micro PLC When the En is high the BIN DEC function produces a 16 bit integer type output from 16 inputs of the if A following type Bit BITO 1 i a OUTPUT BIT 15 M BIT 16 i 16 bits One 16 bit word Inputs Outputs This function supports 16 discrete inputs BITO1 least significant byte BIT16 most significant byte This function supports one 16 bit integer type output 6 5 56 Demultiplexer This function demultiplexer integers It is used to route the input value
280. ybit Hone Comm Type 232 Timetut E 1 105 Frotocol Modbus RIV Data Register Index hi e Low Command los Write Single Coil Register addr 0 Count r IT Auto Data addr IR Manual Zz po 1 Slave Address 1 is default 2 Communication parameters BPS is baud rate Stopbits Databits Communication type RS232 RS485 Actually RS232 or RS485 are just interface of xLogic 3 Command register address and register count Force the switch status of single coil 00000 0XXXX gt Force Single Coil Coutput Pre set the data of single register Set single output register 40000 4XXxXxX 15 Force multi coils on off bit 00000 0XXXX 16 Write multi holding registers data 40000 4XXXX re 4 Where is to save the pre configuration data that would be written to Slave It contains 2 kind ways to pre configuration One is auto mode this data uses the flags in the program such as FM AFM I Q and AQ The manual mode is input a fixed value or bit status Example 1 EASY User Manual xLogic Micro PLC Master Slave No 1 ERT RS485 TEN a EE l l i Slave No 2 l E Slave No 3 l l i Write the I2 bit status of Master xLogic to Slave xLogic with No 1 and control Q1 of Slave via RS485 port The program of master can be made as follows ADM odhoem Frote Faraar ccanant Block nese J Elive Addrete fi p Communicate taum ms a
Download Pdf Manuals
Related Search
Related Contents
三菱オートロータ" iniciar - Codemasters TrigMic Gen2 User Manual EN この添付文書は本剤とともに保管し、服用の際には、よくお読みください Toshiba Portégé Z30T-A1310 SMD 50 - Hilti 取扱説明書 SHー2841 Benutzerinformation User manual Graco 3A1163A User's Manual Copyright © All rights reserved.
Failed to retrieve file